JP2022079770A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can suitably identify behaviors of game balls.

SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, based on entry of game balls to operation ports 38, 39 provided on a game area, an opening/closing operation of an opening/closing accessory 168 in which the game balls can enter an accessory device 150 is performed. The accessory device 150 comprises a V-winning sensor, and when the V-winning sensor detects the game balls, a mode is shifted to an opening/closing execution mode. In the accessory device 150, plural passages which extend to the V-winning sensor are provided, a first distribution member and a second distribution member as distribution means for distributing game balls to the respective passages, are provided, and passage detection sensors 402-404 for detecting the fact that the game balls pass the respective passages, are provided, passage of the game balls in the respective passages is grasped by the passage detection sensors 402-404.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry device provided in a gaming area where a gaming ball flows down or rolls is common. Further, it is known that a game ball flows down or rolls in a variable ball-entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325811

Here, there is still room for improvement in the configuration for specifying the behavior of the game ball.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably specifying the behavior of a gaming ball.

The present invention
A launching means that launches a game ball based on the player's launch operation,
An entry means that allows a game ball launched by the launch means to enter, and a ball entry means.
When a game ball enters the ball entry means, a grant determination means capable of executing a grant determination to grant a privilege to the player, and a grant determination means.
When the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination by the predetermined effect means, and the effect execution means.
Distributing means for distributing the game balls launched by the launching means to a plurality of routes, and
A grasping means for grasping the ball passage of each of the above routes, and
A calculation means capable of calculating a predetermined ratio that can occur within the range of normal operation of the gaming machine by using a plurality of ball passing results grasped by the grasping means.
Equipped with
The calculation means can execute the calculation process so that the ball passing result in a specific state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is not included in the predetermined ratio.
At least the first control means including the grant determination means, the grasping means, and the calculation means, and
At least a second control means provided with the effect executing means, and
Have,
The first control means is provided separately from the second control means, and is characterized in that the first control means is provided with means capable of outputting the calculation result by the calculation means to the means provided so as not to be visible to the player. And.

According to the present invention, the behavior of a game ball can be suitably specified.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of the passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the accessory device. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the rotating body unit which constitutes the accessory device. It is a top view which shows the rotating body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the open timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process under control. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of each round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening / closing pattern table. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the opening / closing pattern in a round and the distribution timing. In the second embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the result table for the second operating port. .. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. As a modification of the second embodiment, it is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing a setting process of each round, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table of each opening and closing pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern table in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table of each opening and closing pattern. In the sixth embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the staging process executed by the MPU of the staging control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) opening and closing pattern table, (b) the flowchart which shows opening correspondence processing, and (c) is the schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline of each special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of each effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing timing setting processing in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each opening timing table. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. It is a flowchart which shows the game control processing in 9th Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the common hold number and the variable display time of the game times, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the overlap between the common hold number and the V distribution. .. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the control start processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing timing setting processing in eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the opening pattern is changed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the opening pattern is changed. As a modification of the ninth embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process. It is a perspective view which shows by disassembling the accessory device in 12th Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the rotating body unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a passage area. It is a flowchart which shows the detection process of the left passing area. It is a flowchart which shows the detection process of the right-passing area. It is a flowchart which shows the detection process of the back passage area. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic process. It is a flowchart which shows the comparison process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each setting value. It is a flowchart which shows the output process. It is a flowchart which shows the output process in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the process for RTC effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the set time for RTC effect and error command output. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between RTC effect and error notification. (A) is a flowchart showing fraud detection processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing fraud notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a passage area in 14th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right sides as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided around the window portion 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the launch handle 60, the game ball is launched toward the game area from the game ball launch mechanism 53 provided below the game area in the inner frame 13. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing intensity of the gaming ball launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

The game area is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. Further, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism by the player rotating the launch handle 60 is The guide rail 34 guides the player to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side opposite to it. It shifts to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

In the range defined as the game area in the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 35, a first operating port (first starting ball entry section) 38, a second operating port (second starting ball entry section) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, and a variable display unit. 42, a main display unit 43, a display unit for accessories 44, and the like are provided, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 35, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 150, it is a detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) arranged on the back side of the game board 24. , The second operation sensor 39c, the entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 6 and the like)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 or when a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out and entered into the general winning opening 35. When a ball is generated, eight prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 38, and the prize balls of both operating ports 38 and 39 are larger. The number may be different.

In addition, an out opening 45 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area through the out opening 45. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 46 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the gaming area is continued without being carried out. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 45, the game ball into the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39 or the through gate 41 Entering a ball is also referred to as winning.

The accessory device 150 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the lateral direction on the lower side of the accessory device 150 in the game board 24. Two first actuating openings 38 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory device 150, and the second actuating openings 39 are arranged at positions sandwiched between the left and right first actuating openings 38. In relation to the bonus device 150, the left and right first actuating openings 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the bonus device 150, and the game ball that did not win the bonus device 150 is one of the first actuation ports. It is possible to reach 38 (winning is possible). Further, the lateral distance between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is equal to or larger than the diameter of one game ball, and the space between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is set. The game ball can flow down.

Further, the second actuating port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150. The second operating port 39 is arranged slightly below both the first operating ports 38, and the game ball that did not enter the accessory device 150 or the first operating port 38 can reach the second operating port 39. (A ball can be entered).

The second operating port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) and in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state). It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). When the electric accessory 39a is closed, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is opened, a prize can be won in the second operating port 39.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 39, and a state in which a prize is not impossible but a prize is less likely to occur than in a state in which the above-mentioned prize is likely to occur. The electric accessory 39a may be switched. Further, the electric accessory 39a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which a prize is likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the surface of the gaming board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

On the main display unit 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39 is clearly indicated by the display of a pattern or the like.

The main display unit 43 is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as CRT and dot matrix. Further, as the pattern displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. The displayed configuration can be considered.

In the accessory display unit 44, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is obtained. Explicitly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 41 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and is displayed in a variable manner. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the lower portion of the main display unit 43 of the decorative member 47, a first reserved light emitting unit 54 and a second reserved light emitting unit 55 corresponding to the main display unit 43 are provided. The first reserved light emitting unit 54 has a plurality of light emitting units (4 in detail) arranged side by side, and the number of game balls winning in the first operating port 38 is reserved up to four, and the first reserved light emitting unit 54 is reserved. The number of holdings is displayed by lighting the unit 54. The second reserved light emitting unit 55 has a plurality of light emitting units (4 in detail) arranged side by side, and the number of game balls winning in the second operating port 39 is reserved up to four, and the second reserved light emitting unit 55 is reserved. The number of holdings is displayed by lighting the unit 55. Further, in the lower portion of the accessory display unit 44 of the decorative member 47, a third reserved light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the third holding light emitting unit 56. It should be noted that a configuration or the like may be configured in which a part or all of the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56 is displayed by a part of the symbol display device 51.

The accessory device 150 is opened on condition that the game ball enters any of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and the game ball further enters the V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by the V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and a big hit state is established.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 (a) is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5 (b) is a plan view simply showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. 6 is a plan view of the accessory device 150. It is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a rotating body unit 180 constituting the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotating body unit 180.

The accessory device 150 is roughly divided into an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161 and the flange 162 of the base frame 161 is screwed and fixed to the game board 24. The base frame 161 is vertically partitioned by a ball receiving plate 163 extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 penetrating the front and rear are formed.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening / closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161. A passage forming member 171 and a drive unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back surface side of the base frame 161. A pair of opening / closing accessory drive units 173 (electromagnetic solenoid) are attached to the back surface of the drive unit fixing plate 172. There is. One end of the link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive unit fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft portion of the opening / closing accessory 168. It is connected. Therefore, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened by driving the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173.

Explaining the opening operation in detail, each opening / closing accessory 168 stands upward when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited), and the respective tip portions are close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening / closing accessory 168 opens outward, and a game ball is located between the tip of each opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. There is a gap larger than one. With such a configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the accessory device 150 only when each opening / closing accessory 168 is opened and the accessory device 150 is in the open state. Even when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening / closing accessory 168 stands upright), when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). It suffices if it is more difficult to enter the accessory device 150 than (when the opening / closing accessory 168 is open to the outside), and it is useful when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited). It may be configured so that the ball can enter the object device 150. For example, when the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is being driven, the gap between the tip of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 It is conceivable that the same gap will be larger when driven.

Further, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is configured so as not to be visible from the front of the gaming machine due to the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172, and the back surface side of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by the cover member 174. There is.

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The extending wall 175a formed on the upper part of the front frame 175 extends upward from the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161 and is in front of the game ball reaching on the ball receiving plate 163 by the extending wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163, and a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the passage plate 177 (FIG. FIG. 5 (b)). The passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and the width is further narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball that reaches the ball receiving plate 163 is a game ball. You will be guided to the passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. As a result, the entry of the game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The inlet sensor 179 is composed of a well-known proximity sensor.

A rotating body unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be located below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 7, the rotating body unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 that is recessed downward in the substantially center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in a plan view. Then, an annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper surface opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is symmetrical, and is inclined so as to be lower from the center on the back side toward the center on the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center of the back side of the guidance passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. The passage wall 183a forming the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage wall 183a, and a passage cover 184 extending in the horizontal direction is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. .. However, the entrance opening 184a is formed in the passage cover 184, and in a plan view (see FIG. 8), the back side portion of the guidance passage 183 is configured so that only the back side center is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184a overlaps with the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the center of the back side of the guide passage 183.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183. The ball distribution unit 185 has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the center thereof toward both the left and right sides. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guidance passage 183 is distributed to either the left or right. Then, by rolling along the inclination of the guidance passage 183, the guide passage 183 is guided to the front side. On the front side of the guide passage 183, a lead-out portion 186 inclined toward the recess 182 side is formed.

The concave portion 182 is formed with a V winning opening 182a on the bottom surface thereof. The V winning opening 182a leads to the V winning passage 191a formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, the V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning passage 191a, and the game ball passing through the V winning passage 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

Further, an outlet 182b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The outlet 182b leads to the outlet passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the outlet 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the outlet passage 191b. In this case, the disengagement sensor 193 is provided in the disengagement passage 191b, and the game ball passing through the disengagement passage 191b is detected by the disengagement sensor 193. The V winning sensor 192 and the disconnection sensor 193 are composed of well-known proximity sensors. Further, the game ball discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the disconnection passage 191b is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge passage (not shown).

A drive unit 194 for a rotating body is attached to the discharge passage forming member 191 from below, and an output shaft 194a extending in the vertical direction of the driving unit 194 for the rotating body is a discharge passage forming member 191 and an induction passage forming member 181. Penetrates. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. The drive unit 194 for the rotating body may be used as a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disk shape having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the recess 182 of the guide passage forming member 181, and is located in the recess 182. Then, the rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise with the driving of the rotating body driving unit 194. Ten ball guide portions 202 recessed inward are formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body 201, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Of these, the nine ball guides 202 are bottomed exit guides 203, and one ball guide 202 is a bottomless V winning opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to be lower toward the outside. Each ball guide unit 202 has a size sufficient to accommodate one game ball, and the game ball derived from the lead-out unit 186 of the guide passage 183 enters any of the ball guide units 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide portion 204 reaches the upper part of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b as the rotating body 201 rotates, and enters the exit passage 191b from the outlet 182b.

Further, in the present embodiment, a rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided in order to grasp the rotation position of the rotating body 201. The rotation position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b facing each other at predetermined intervals, and a light emitting element is arranged on one arm portion 196a and the light emitting element on the other arm portion 196b. A light receiving element is arranged at the opposite position. The rotation position detection sensor 196 is provided on the sensor board 197, and the sensor board 197 is driven for a rotating body between both arm portions 196a and 196b (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element) of the rotation position detection sensor 196. The cut van 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so as to be located there.

The cut van 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the notch 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotation position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut van 198, and only when the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b with the rotation of the output shaft 194a, the light from the light emitting element Light reaches the light receiving element. Then, by forming the notch portion 198a corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element has detected the light from the light emitting element. , The rotation position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. Incidentally, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes on the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between both arm portions 196a and 196b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left and right side of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the left side of the guide passage 183 on which the outlet 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is arranged above the outlet 182b in the guidance passage 183 as a bottom portion forming a part of the floor portion of the guidance passage 183. The first distribution member 300 is arranged on the back side of the outlet 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to the first distribution drive unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled to drive and control the floor portion of the induction passage 183. Displaces into a non-distribution state that constitutes a part of the above, and a distribution state that rotates downward with the rear end of the first distribution member 300 as a rotation axis and inclines downward toward the outlet 182b. ..

According to the above configuration, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, it is on the left side in the induction passage 183. The distributed game ball passes over the first distribution member 300 with the first distribution member 300 as the floor portion, and reaches any of the ball guide portions 202 in the rotating body 201. On the other hand, when the first distribution drive unit 300a is driven (excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the first distribution member 300 is inclined toward the lower outlet 182b. The game ball passing over the first distribution member 300 is guided to the outlet 182b (outway passage 191b) as it is without reaching the rotating body 201. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distribution member 300.

Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 250 for directly guiding the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning passage 191a is provided. The warp passage 250 has a passage region 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage region 251 is formed by being curved toward the rear lower side. More specifically, an opening (not shown) opened toward the rear is formed in the passage wall 183a behind the ball distribution portion 185 in the guidance passage 183, and the passage region 251 is formed in the opening. The entrance portion 252 is communicated. Further, on the upper side of the discharge passage forming member 191, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass toward the V winning passage 191a is formed, and the warp is formed at the rear end portion 261 of the V guide passage 260. The exit portion 253 of the passage region 251 in the passage 250 is communicated. The V-guide passage 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V-winning passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V-guide passage 260 is communicated with the V-winning passage 191a.

With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guidance passage 183 is guided to the warp passage 250 side, it passes through the passage region 251 in the warp passage 250 and is led out to the V guidance passage 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V guidance passage 260, enters the V winning passage 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, upstream (front) of the entrance portion 252 of the warp passage 250, the inflow of the game ball into the warp passage 250 is restricted (whether it is distributed to the warp passage 250 or to the left or right in the guidance passage 183). A second distribution member 310 capable of performing) is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to the second distribution drive unit 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the drive control of the second distribution drive unit 310a causes the inlet portion 252 of the warp passage 250 to be driven. It is displaced into a non-distribution state arranged in front and a distribution state arranged above it and not arranged in front of the entrance portion 252. That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not in the excited state) and is in the non-distribution state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250 and is in the guide passage 183. It is distributed to the left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is driven (excited state) and the distribution state is reached, the game ball can flow into the warp passage 250 (rear), and in this case, the rotating body 201 swings. It is directly derived to the V winning passage 191a without passing a minute. That is, the V winning probability (probability detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the second distribution member 310.

The ball distribution portion 185 in the center of the back side of the guidance passage 183 has a downward inclined surface so that the game ball can be distributed not only to the left and right but also to the rear. However, when the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is arranged on the above-mentioned downhill inclined surface, and the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of the event that the game ball tries to be distributed to the downhill slope side and the game ball stays there is suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the position (ball distribution unit 185) to be distributed by the second distribution member 310 is about 0.3 sec. The passage length is set so as to be. Further, the period until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 (on the first distribution member 300) is about 0.5 sec. The passage length is set in.

The game ball entered in the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches the ball distribution portion 185 formed in the center of the back side of the guidance passage 183. Then, the second distribution member 310 arranged in the ball distribution unit 185 is distributed to either the left or right guidance passage 183 on condition that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state. Then, it is guided to the lead-out unit 186 by rolling on the guide passage 183 on the distributed side. The game ball guided to the lead-out unit 186 is led out into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the lead-out unit 186. However, when the ball is distributed to the left side in the ball distribution unit 185, it is a condition that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distribution state, which is derived to the recess 182 side. That is, the game ball guided to the guide passage 183 on the left side may be led out to the recess 182 side, or may be led out to the outlet 182b as it is.

The rotating body 201 is constantly rotating at a constant speed in the recess 182, and the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the outlet guide portion 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the detachment sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball led out into the recess 182 and entering the V winning opening guide portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192. Then, the jackpot state is generated by being detected by the V winning sensor 192.

When the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185 and the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, the game ball is not only on the left or right guidance passage 183 but also on the warp passage 250 side. Is sorted. Then, by being distributed to the warp passage 250 side, it is directly detected by the V winning sensor 192 without passing through the distribution by the first distribution member 300 or the rotating body 201, and a big hit state is generated.

Since one of the 10 ball guide portions 202 has the V winning opening guide portion 204, the game ball that has entered the recess 182 of the accessory device 150 has a 1/10 probability of the V winning opening 182a. Will enter. Further, when the game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the removal sensor 193, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71. Further, the movement of the gaming ball on the rotating body unit 180 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

However, the number of ball guide units 202, the number of V winning opening guide units 204, and the like are not limited to the above. It may be configured to win a V with a probability of / 6, or it may be configured to win a V with another probability.

The power lines and signal lines of the sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc., and the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. in the above-mentioned accessory device 150 are relay terminal boards attached to the guide passage forming member 181. It is connected to 199. Then, these signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device described later, and the main control device detects the entry of a ball and controls the drive of the drive unit. However, a configuration in which a part or all of these is performed on the staging control device side, which will be described later, which is a control device on the sub side, may be used.

In the symbol display device 51, notification that the game ball enters any of the operating ports 38 and 39 and the accessory device 150 is in the open state, notification when the game ball enters the accessory device 150, and so on. Distribution rate to both distribution members 300, 310, notification of distribution result, etc., notification of distribution status by rotating body 201, notification of occurrence of jackpot state by detecting game ball with V winning sensor 192, etc. In addition to the notification during the normal game state, the notification of the round effect during the jackpot state is also performed. The contents of these effects may be such that the player can clearly grasp each game situation.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint portion 85, the box base can be connected to the box base. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are used. Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of bonding pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling piece 86 and the coupling piece 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. The binding process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The staging control device 82 includes a staging control board that controls voice, lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the staging control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured in 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collective unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the staging control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game field are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is mounted with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured by accommodating a payout control board that controls the payout device 96 in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and a launch control board in a substrate box, and the substrate generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further determined by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the firing handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

A main control device 81, an effect control device 82, and a display control device 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including a payout device 96, a payout control device 97, a power supply, and a launch control. The device 98 is mounted.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 81, the board box accommodating the main control board 111 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. .. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer is used as an adhesion target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply having a function of supplying operating power and a launch control device 98 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include the first operating sensor 38a and the second operating sensor 39c that detect the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39, as well as the general winning opening as a winning detection sensor that detects the winning of other winning portions. A sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a prize in the through gate 41, and the like are provided. Further, various sensors include an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a detachment sensor 193, a rotation position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, the MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion, and positions the rotating body 201. To grasp. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39.

A power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the prize.

Various commands for staging are output to the staging control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the staging control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connecting unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, an electric accessory drive unit 39b, an opening / closing accessory drive unit 173, a first distribution drive unit 300a, a second distribution drive unit 310a, a rotating body drive unit 194, etc. Is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize is generated in any of the actuation ports 38 and 39 or the opening / closing execution mode is shifted based on the winning in the V winning sensor 192, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under control, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed. Further, in these cases, the drive control of both distribution drive units 300a and 310a is performed, and the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 194 is performed.

Further, when the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a is clearly shown, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and the launch control device 98 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 are responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the precision plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34, and the game ball is supplied with a drive signal from the power supply and the launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

The staging control device 82 includes a staging control board 141 on which the MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 is a ROM 143 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 142, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A certain RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 142 drives and controls various light emitting units 54 to 56, 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 81. Further, the command as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with.

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 152, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 152, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP155 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timings of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

The character ROM 156 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 156 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of the main control device 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 51, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots and the jackpot used for determining the jackpot type such as whether or not to open / close the opening / closing accessory 168. The type counter C2, the open type counter CS for setting the waiting period from the winning to the open state when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the opening type counter CS. The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is stored as acquired information when a prize is won in the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display unit and a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, respectively. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 43, and is the execution area AE at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in, the hit / fail judgment is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 99, the maximum value (that is, 99) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in the result table storage area 113a as the result table storage area 113a as the win / loss information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a).

As shown in FIG. 11A, the result table is set as a game result, a loss result, a direct hit result, and a normal opening result. The normal opening result is a game result in which the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is opened based on the winning of the operating openings 38 and 39. In the present embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened once, and when a winning is generated in the second operating port 39, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened twice. It is set to be. The disengagement result is a result that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened even when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won. In this case, the accessory device 150 cannot be awarded a prize, and the transition to the jackpot state (open / close execution mode) cannot be expected. The direct hit result is the result of shifting to the jackpot state (opening / closing execution mode) only when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won, and even if the accessory device 150 is not won or the V prize is not generated. , It shifts to the jackpot state as described above.

Of the jackpot random number counters C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that result in a loss is one, the number of random number values that result in a direct hit is one, and the others are normally open results. It is the corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the winning of both operating ports 38 and 39, the number of opening / closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38 and 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100, which is 1/100. Although the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened with a probability, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed without passing the V prize, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened with a probability of 1/100, and the opening / closing execution mode is entered. No migration is done.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that no direct hit result or loss result is provided. However, by including these results, the game can be diversified, and especially if a direct hit result is provided, a game in which a prize is not frequently generated in the accessory device 150 due to nail adjustment or the like. Even if it is a platform, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit state, and even if it is such a game platform, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the motivation for the game.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that sets the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in the various table storage areas 113d as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b).

As shown in FIG. 11B, 16R (round) continuation mode and continuation rate fluctuation mode are set in the type table as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which 16 round games are executed, and the continuation rate fluctuation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game changes in the round game.

Here, the round game means that (1) the opening / closing accessory 168 has been opened a predetermined upper limit opening number of times, and (2) the total number of winning balls to the accessory device 150 is predetermined. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions of reaching the upper limit is met. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened / closed 19 times in one round game, and the maximum number of winnings in one round game is set to nine.

The maximum number of round games played in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 16 regardless of the jackpot result in any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins a prize in the accessory device 150 during the round game, and the game ball wins a V prize.

The open type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The open type counter CS is updated periodically. However, this update timing is set to be different from the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 and jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, fraudulent acts of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method are less likely to occur. The updated open type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39, similarly to the other counters C1 and C2. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 39. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the display unit.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the opening timing table in the opening timing table storage area 113c as the standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. It is stored as (waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the opening timing table will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (c).

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), as the opening timing, a plurality of types of waiting times (waiting periods) from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39 (or the closing timing of the previous opening / closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 types of standby times are set from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec in increments of 0.1 sec. The interval (0.1 sec) between each of these times is set to be shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec cycle) of the game ball, and the accessory device 150 is awarded by so-called stop hitting or the like. The act of intentionally changing (increasing) the probability is less likely to occur.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41.

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 39a to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to the open state.

In this embodiment, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different regardless of the gaming state. That is, it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or the open time or the number of open times is large (so-called high frequency support mode), or the open lottery has a lower probability of winning or is open. There is no mode such as a state where the time and the number of times of opening are small (so-called low frequency support mode). If the configuration has these modes, the range of increase / decrease in the number of balls released can be large, so that it is possible to improve the interest. On the other hand, in order to adjust the amount of balls released in the high frequency support mode, in the low frequency support mode In some cases, it is unavoidable to take specifications such as setting the frequency of winning prizes to both operating ports 38 and 39 low. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, it is difficult for the operating ports 38 and 39 to win a prize, and there is a possibility that the motivation for the game may be reduced. Therefore, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the gaming state as in the present embodiment, it is possible to expect a certain amount of prizes to be won in the operating ports 38 and 39 even in the normal gaming state, and the game. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation for.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed for advancing the game by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 112, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically (eg, every 2 msec) started by the MPU 112.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read, and the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read. Executes the process of making a judgment and saving the detection information. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the ball command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects that the prize is won in the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 41. In the winning process for through, when a winning is generated in the through gate 41, the number of winning combinations stored in the electric service holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On condition that this is the condition, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c. Further, the effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the third hold light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the number of hold storages for the accessory.

Then, after the winning process for the operating port is executed in step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the winning process for the operating port, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in either the operating port 38 or 39, and if it is determined that the game ball has won a prize, numerical information such as the jackpot random number counter C1 at that time is determined. Is acquired, and the numerical information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

Specifically, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 and 14.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operating port 38 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 38, in step S202, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97. In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 38. In step S204, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RaN held and stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold storage number RaN). In the following step S205, a process of setting the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened to one is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "1" in the open count counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, in step S206, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operating port 38, in step S207, whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 39 (starting winning) is determined by the second operating port 39. Judgment is made based on the detection status of the detection sensor corresponding to. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 39, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S208. In the following step S209, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is read, and the start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold storage number RbN). In the following step S211, a process of setting the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened to 2 is executed. Specifically, the process of setting "2" in the above-mentioned open count counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the process of step S205 or step S211, there is a possibility that the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S206, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when both step S201 and step S207 are NO, that is, when the game ball does not win in any of the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, whether or not the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) is determined. judge. If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the hold area for the result display unit corresponding in step S302 is set. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) in step S303 is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 updated in step S103, and the open type counter CS updated in the normal processing described later, are vacant in the corresponding result display section holding area. It is stored in the first storage area of the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the start hold storage number RaN for the first operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set to the holding area Ra for the first operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Ra corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN for the first operating port incremented by 1 in step S302.

When the start hold storage number RbN for the second operating port is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS are set to the holding area Rb for the second operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area, that is, the hold area Rb corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN for the second operating port incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the process of step S304, the information acquisition process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S406 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S408 and S409 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S402, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the open type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S403, a game processing process for advancing the game is executed. In this game control process, drive control of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is performed.

After executing the game control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state transition process, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode. The details of the game control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is executed. In this electric service support process, whether or not to open the electric service 39a by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114 is used to open the electric service. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 39a is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

After that, in step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the open type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Further, in step S409, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is added by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the open type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The open type counter CS can also be updated at random.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 22.

In the game control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag (open / close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open / close execution mode flag storage area (open / close execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. do. The open / close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is deleted when the open / close execution mode is terminated in the game state transition process.

When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game control process is performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game progress process of steps S507 to S509. To finish. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game starts regardless of whether or not the operating openings 38 and 39 have been awarded (the bonus device triggered by the winning of the operating openings 38 and 38). It will not be opened (150).

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the accessory device 150 is in the control state. Whether or not the control state is in progress includes the period of opening / closing operation of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39. The determination of whether or not this is the control state is determined to be in the control state on condition that the accessory control flag is stored in the accessory control flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. do. The above-mentioned bonus control flag is stored when the game result based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 is the opening result (normal opening result in this embodiment), and the bonus device 150 based on the result is stored. It is erased at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing).

If the accessory device 150 is not in the control state, the process proceeds to the game start process of steps S503 to S506. In the game start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuating port 38 and the second actuating port 39. Therefore, the game control process is terminated as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is set for variable display in step S504. The data setting process of the above is executed, and further, in step S505, the pass / fail determination process of determining the game result of the data set in the above data setting process is executed, and in step S506, the accessory device 150 is controlled. After executing the control start process to be started, the game control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process of step S504, the pass / fail determination process of step S505, and the control start process of step S506 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S607 is executed, and when the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S608 to S613.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number CRN is 1 or more, as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If it is stored, the data stored in the second result display unit hold area Rb should be set for variable display regardless of whether the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the first result display unit and the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, the hold information for the second result display unit corresponding to the second operation port 39 is stored. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb has priority.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S602, the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S603, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S606, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is memorized, it is erased, and if it is not memorized, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is for specifying whether the target of this hit / fail determination corresponds to the hold information of the first result display unit hold area Ra or the second result display unit hold area Rb. Information.

In the following step S607, a shift command (shift generation information), which is information for causing the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, to the first operation port 38. A shift command including information that the data is supported is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The staging control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the first hold light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S608, the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is decremented by 1. In the following step S609, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first. The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S612, the second result display unit flag (second result display unit information) is set in the second result display unit flag storage area (second result display unit information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If it is not stored, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if it is stored, that state is maintained.

In the following step S613, a shift command (shift generation information), which is information for causing the staging control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the hold area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, corresponds to the second operation port 39. A shift command containing information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The staging control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the second hold light emitting unit 55 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command.

Next, the pass / fail determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a direct hit result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of ROM 113. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S702, and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp the occurrence of the open execution mode.

In the following step S703, the direct hit command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S703, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the direct hit is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The direct hit command set in step S703 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for starting the open / close execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

If the result is not a direct hit in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is an outlier result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the execution area AE this time and the result table of ROM 113. If the result is off, the process proceeds to step S705, and the value set by the open count counter in step S205 or step S211 in the above-mentioned winning process for the operating port (FIG. 13) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S706, the disconnection command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S706, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the result is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The disconnection command set in step S706 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is not in the open state based on the received disconnection command.

If the result is not out of order in step S704, the normal release command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S707. Further, in step S704, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the normal opening result is executed. After that, the true / false determination process is terminated.

The normal release command set in step S707 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state based on the received normal release command.

That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning / failing determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39.

Next, the control start process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the control start process, first, in step S801, a process of grasping the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened is executed with reference to the opening number counter in the RAM 114. In the following step S802, the opening / closing timing setting process is executed. In the open / close timing setting process, among the data shifted to the execution area AE in the above data setting process (FIG. 17), the data related to the open timing, that is, the value of the open type counter CS and the open timing table stored in the ROM 113. And, the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 this time is set with reference to. Specifically, from this process, the numerical value corresponding to how many seconds after the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (whether the drive control of the opening / closing accessory drive unit 173 is started) is read from the opening timing table, and the RAM 114 Input to the standby counter provided in various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing accessory 168 is open.

In the following step S803, the first distribution setting process is executed. In the first distribution setting process, the first distribution member 300 is set to the distribution state at the timing when the predetermined first period (0.0sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. , The first distribution member 300 is set to be in the non-distribution state at the timing when the predetermined second period (1.5 sec) has elapsed.

Then, in step S804, the second distribution setting process is executed, and then the control start process is terminated. In the second distribution setting process, the second distribution member 310 is set to the distribution state at the timing when a predetermined third period (1.8 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. , The second distribution member 310 is set to be in the non-distribution state at the timing when the predetermined fourth period (0.1 sec) has elapsed.

These timings can be grasped by the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Specifically, in step S803 and step S804, first, a value corresponding to the first and third periods (a value corresponding to the timing of shifting from the non-distribution state to the distribution state) is used as the corresponding distribution counter. input. These distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at predetermined intervals and become predetermined values (for example, "0"), so that the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (non-distribution state → distribution state) timing. It can be grasped that. Then, in the distribution process (FIG. 21) described later, the displacement of the distribution members 300 and 310 (drive control of the drive units 300a and 310a) is performed, and the value corresponding to the period for maintaining the distribution state is set. It is input to the same distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of displacement (distribution state → non-distribution state) again.

That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are displaced is uniquely determined, and more specifically, the opening / closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is opened. The period from the timing until the respective distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced is defined.

Regarding the first to fourth periods, the period during which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state is the period during which the game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 can reach the distribution members 300 and 310. It is set to be.

Next, the game progress process in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described. As described above, the game progress process is a process performed when it is determined in step S502 that the accessory device 150 is in the control state. That is, when the control state is in step S502, the control process is executed in step S507, the distribution process is executed in step S508, and the winning process is executed in the subsequent step S509. , End the game control process.

First, the process under control in step S507 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this determination, it can be confirmed whether or not the opening timing is reached by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S802. If the opening timing is in step S901, the opening control process is executed in step S902. In this process, the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing accessory 168 in the open state. Further, in step S902, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 2 sec in the present embodiment) to the open period counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The opening period counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that it is possible to grasp that the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

Then, in the subsequent step S903, the process of subtracting "1" from the open count counter of the RAM 114 is executed, and then the process during this control is terminated.

If it is not the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the closing timing is reached by referring to the value of the opening period counter input in step S902. If the closing timing is in step S904, the closing control process is executed in step S905. In this process, by terminating the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

In the following step S906, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of opening is "0" by referring to the number of times of opening of RAM 114. If it is "0", the control end process is executed in step S907. In this process, a process for terminating the control of the accessory device 150 for one reserved information is performed. Specifically, the presence or absence of errors in each drive unit 173, 300a, 310a, 194 is confirmed, and the process of returning to the initial position is performed. In the following step S908, the control end command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, the processing during this control is terminated.

The control end command set in step S908 is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 is completed based on the received control end command.

If the number of times of opening is not "0" in step S906, the waiting period setting process is executed in step S909. In the waiting period setting process, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current waiting period (uniformly 1 sec in the present embodiment) into the waiting period counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

If it is not the closing timing in step S904, the process under control is terminated after the process of step S908 is executed or the process of step S909 is executed.

Next, the distribution process of step S508 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. As described above, this determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the first distribution counter of the RAM 114. Then, in the case of the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1002. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the first distribution drive unit 300a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the second period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1002, if the current control corresponds to the opening twice (opening based on the winning of the second operating port 39), the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened from the opening timing in the same manner as in the process of step S803. The first distribution member 300 is put into the distribution state at the timing when the predetermined first period elapses, and the first distribution member 300 is not distributed at the timing when the predetermined second period elapses. Set to be in the state. The period from the displacement of the first distribution member 300 from the distribution state to the non-distribution state to the opening timing of the second opening / closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a fifth period. In this embodiment, this fifth period is set to 1.0 sec.

If it is not the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 in step S1001, or after the process of step S1002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310. As described above, this determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the second distribution counter of the RAM 114. Then, in the case of the displacement timing, the second distribution control process is executed in step S1004. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the drive state, the drive is terminated, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-displacement state. Displace. When the second distribution drive unit 310a is not in the drive state, the drive is started to displace the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the fourth period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1004, if the current control corresponds to the opening twice (opening based on the winning of the second operating port 39), the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened from the opening timing in the same manner as in the process of step S804. The second distribution member 310 is put into the distribution state at the timing when the predetermined third period elapses, and the second distribution member 310 is not distributed at the timing when the predetermined fourth period elapses. Set to be in the state. The period from the displacement of the second distribution member 310 from the distribution state to the non-distribution state to the opening timing of the second opening / closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a sixth period. In this embodiment, this sixth period is set to 0.6 sec.

If it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1003, or after the processing of step S1004 is executed, the main distribution processing is terminated.

Next, the winning process of step S509 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In step S1101, the detection signal from the entrance sensor 179 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150. If a prize has been won, the prize-winning command in the accessory is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S1102. After that, the processing during this control is terminated.

The in-feature winning command set in step S1102 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 notifies that a prize has been generated in the bonus device 150 (notification for paying attention to the operation of the game ball in the bonus device 150) based on the received bonus winning command. To execute the processing for.

If the entrance sensor 179 is not in the detection state in step S1101 (including already winning), or after the process of step S1102 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the detection signal from the V winning sensor 192 is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the V winning has occurred. When a V-winning occurs, in step S1104, by storing the V-winning flag in the RAM 114, it is stored that a big hit state (shift to the open / close execution mode) occurs. Then, in step S1105, the control end process is executed, and in step S1106, the control end command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

The process of step S1105 is the same as the process of step S907. Further, the control end command set in the process of step S1106 may be the same as the command of step S908, or may include information indicating that a V prize has occurred. Even if the command is the same as the command in step S908, since the command for it is output at the start of the open / close execution mode, the effect control device 82 can grasp the transition to the open / close execution mode and suppress the increase in the number of commands. It is possible. On the other hand, if the command in step S1106 includes information indicating that a V prize has occurred, the event can be quickly grasped on the effect control device 82 side, and an effect that congratulates the V prize can be produced. It is possible to perform the game ball at a timing closer to the V winning timing.

If V winning is not detected in step S1103, or after the processing of step S1106 is executed, the main winning processing is terminated.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process of step S404 in the normal process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 28 and the like.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the game result of this time corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When the V winning flag is stored, the opening / closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S1203. In the start processing, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without starting the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for the opening of the opening / closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

In the following step S1204, a type determination process for determining the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is executed. Specifically, among the pending information stored in the execution area AE this time, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type table of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the type of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode. It is determined whether the mode is the continuation rate fluctuation mode.

In the following step S1205, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the 16R continuation mode based on the processing result of step S1204. In the 16R continuation mode, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1206. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode.

If the 16R continuation mode is not set in step S1205, or after the process of step S1206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, "15" is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and "19" is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d. .. The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one open / close execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 counts the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter to do.

After executing the process of step S1207, the opening command is set in step S1208. This set opening command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This opening command contains information on whether it is a 16R continuation mode or a continuation rate fluctuation mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

In the following step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

On the other hand, if the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, the opening / closing process is executed in step S1211.

Here, the opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173. When the opening / closing accessory 168 is not being opened, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1303, timers provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 are used. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter T is "0".

If the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S1304 to execute the setting process for each round.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, it is first determined in step S1401 whether or not the start timing of the current setting process is the start timing of each round. Specifically, when the second round counter RC2 is "0", it is determined that it is the start timing of each round. If it is not the start timing, this setting process ends as it is.

In the following step S1402, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode. When the continuation flag is not stored and the opening / closing execution mode this time is the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the process of grasping the number of rounds is executed in step S1403. In this process, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode of the round set in the setting process of this round is grasped with reference to the value of the first round counter RC1. Then, in step S1404, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the round pattern table, the opening / closing pattern of each round is defined in one opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of types of opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing accessory 168 of each round are set, and an opening / closing pattern A, an opening / closing pattern B, and an opening / closing pattern C are set.

As described above, in the 16R continuation mode, the round game is unconditionally continued until the 16th round. On the other hand, in the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the next round is continued when the continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins a prize in the accessory device 150 during the round game, and the game ball wins a V prize.

In the present embodiment, by making the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 of each round different, the continuation rate of each round in the continuation rate fluctuation mode is changed. More specifically, the opening / closing pattern A is easier to continue than B and C. Comparing the opening / closing pattern B and the opening / closing pattern C, the probability of winning V may differ depending on the timing of entering the game ball.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the opening / closing pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, the opening / closing mode is different depending on the number of times of opening / closing in the opening / closing patterns A to C of each round. Is set to.

For example, in the opening / closing pattern A, during the 19 opening times in one round game, the opening times of the first to 16th times (RC2 = 1 to 16) are longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball (0.6 sec). (3 times), open for 1.8 sec, and then close for 0.5 sec (also referred to as open / close pattern A1). Further, in the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), 1.0 sec is opened and then 4.0 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern A2). That is, in the case of A1, winning a prize in the accessory device 150 is relatively easy to occur in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of A2, although it can occur, it is less likely to occur than in A1.

Regarding the opening / closing pattern B, in the first to tenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 10), 0.2 sec is opened and then 2.1 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B1). In the 11th to 13th times (RC2 = 11 to 13), 1.0 sec is opened and then 1.3 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B2). The 14th to 16th times (RC2 = 14 to 16) are the same as the opening / closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), 0.2 sec is opened and then 4.8 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern B3). That is, in the case of B1 and B3, the prize for the accessory device 150 hardly occurs in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of B2, the prize may occur at substantially the same level as A2.

Regarding the opening / closing pattern C, in the first to 16th opening times (RC2 = 1 to 16), 0.2 sec is opened and then 2.1 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern C1). The opening / closing pattern C1 is the same opening / closing pattern as the opening / closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), 1.0 sec is opened and then 4.0 sec is closed (also referred to as opening / closing pattern C2). The opening / closing pattern C2 is the same opening / closing pattern as the opening / closing pattern A1. That is, in the case of C1, the prize for the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, and in the case of C2, it is the same as A2.

As described above, the opening / closing pattern differs depending on the opening / closing patterns A to C set in each round. Further, even in the same round, the opening / closing mode differs depending on the number of opening / closing times.

On the other hand, regarding the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, the operation mode is the same in each round.

Specifically, regarding the first distribution member 300, regardless of the opening / closing patterns A to C, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in the first to tenth opening times (RC2 = 1 to 10). It is displaced to the distribution state after the period TA1 (0.0sec) from the start, and is displaced to the non-distribution state after the period TA2 (0.1sec) from the displacement, and then non-distributed over the period TA3 (1.3sec). The distribution state is maintained (also referred to as operation pattern VA1). The 11th to 16th times (RC2 = 11 to 16) are displaced to the distribution state after the period TA4 (0.0 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and are not displaced after the period TA5 (1.0 sec) from the displacement. It is displaced to the distribution state, and then the non-distribution state is maintained for TA6 (1.3 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VA2). The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) do not displace in the non-distribution state (also referred to as operation pattern VA3).

The second distribution member 310 does not displace in the non-distribution state in the first to 16th (RC2 = 1 to 16) opening times regardless of the opening / closing patterns A to C (operation pattern). Also called VB1). The 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19) are displaced to the distribution state after the period TB1 (1.0 sec) from the opening start of the opening / closing accessory 168, and are not displaced after the period TB2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement. It is displaced to the distribution state, and then the non-distribution state is maintained for TB3 (3.9 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VB2).

Here, in each round game in the open / close execution mode, the total operation period of the open time and the close time at each open / close (RC2) is predetermined. That is, regardless of the opening / closing pattern, the operation period at the time of opening / closing the first to 16th times (RC2 = 1 to 16) is the first operation period (2.3 sec), and the 17th to 19th times (RC2 =). The operation period at the time of opening and closing 17 to 19) is the second operation period (5.0 sec).

Further, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the opening / closing execution mode do not change in relation to the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 of the opening / closing accessory 168. That is, regardless of the opening / closing pattern, the first distribution member 300 operates according to the VA1 operation pattern during the first to tenth opening / closing (RC2 = 1 to 10), and the eleventh to 16th (RC2 =). When opening and closing 11 to 16), it operates according to the operation pattern of VA2, and when opening and closing the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19), it operates according to the operation pattern of VA3. Further, the second distribution member 310 operates according to the operation pattern of VB1 at the time of opening and closing the first to 16th times (RC2 = 1 to 16), and operates with the operation pattern of VB2 at the time of opening and closing the 17th to 19th times (RC2 = 17 to 19). It works with the movement pattern.

In other words, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is 23.0 sec (0 sec to 23.0 sec, 2.3 sec × 10 times) from the start of one round game (at the time of the first opening of the round game). It switches from VA1 to VA2, and switches from VA2 to VA3 36.8 sec (23.0 sec to 36.8 sec, 23.0 sec + 2.3 sec x 6 times) after the start of the same round game. Then, the operation of VA3 continues until after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

Further, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is VB1 36.8 sec (0 sec to 36.8 sec, 2.3 sec × 16 times) from the start of one round game (at the time of the first opening of the round game). Is switched to VB2, and the operation of VB2 continues until after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec + 5.0 sec × 3 times).

That is, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniquely defined in each round.

Explaining in more detail the relationship between each opening / closing pattern A to C and the operation pattern of each distribution member, in the case of opening / closing pattern A, a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 during A1 (RC2 = 1 to 16). It is relatively easy to occur, and moreover, it is easy to win a V prize between VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10) (it is difficult to be distributed to the off side). On the other hand, even if it is between A1 (RC2 = 1 to 16), it is less likely to win a V prize between VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16) than VA1 (it is easy to be distributed to the outside). During this A1, distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed (VB1). In the opening / closing pattern A, when it becomes A2 (RC2 = 17 to 19), the prize for the accessory device 150 is less likely to be generated than that for A1, but the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the disengaged side. (VA3), and distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, in the case of a round with an opening / closing pattern A, there is a high possibility that the round will be continued because the occurrence of a V prize can be relatively expected in any period (RC2 = 1 to 19).

In the case of the opening / closing pattern B, the prize for the accessory device 150 hardly occurs during B1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), but if a prize occurs, the first distribution member 300 swings to the out side. It is difficult to divide (VA1). When it becomes B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13), it becomes possible to generate a prize in the accessory device 150, but it becomes easy for the first distribution member 300 to distribute to the outward side (VA2). During the period of B1 and VA2 (RC2 = 14 to 16), the prize for the accessory device 150 hardly occurs, and even if the prize is won, it is easy to be distributed to the off side. In the case of B3 (RC2 = 17 to 19), although the prize for the accessory device 150 is hardly generated, the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the outside (VA3), and the second distribution is performed. Distribution to the V winning side by the member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, in relation to the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, if the opening / closing pattern B is round, V winning occurs during the period of B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13). If not, it is unlikely that a V prize will occur in other periods, and it is unlikely that the round will continue.

In the case of the opening / closing pattern C, the prize for the accessory device 150 hardly occurs during C1 (RC2 = 1 to 16), but if it does occur, it is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10). ) Is more likely to win a V prize than while it is VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16). On the other hand, if it becomes C2 (RC2 = 17 to 19), the winning of the accessory device 150 is more likely to occur than that of C1, and further, the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the outward side (VA3). ), Distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, in view of the relationship between the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the round of the opening / closing pattern C, V winning hardly occurs in the period of C1, but in the period of C2. We can expect the occurrence of V prizes and the continuation of the round.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 are the same in each round, but the ease of continuing the round differs depending on the opening / closing pattern of each round (RC1). do. In addition, the ease of continuing the round (easiness of winning a V) differs depending on the number of times of opening and closing (RC2) in each round.

Returning to the description of the setting process of each round (FIG. 25), after referring to the round pattern table in step S1404, the process of setting the opening / closing pattern of the corresponding round is executed in step S1405. Specifically, various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the patterns A to C. For example, in the case of the open / close pattern A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1402, or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, "9" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game, and in the present embodiment, the round game ends when nine game balls win the accessory device 150 in one round game. Then, in step S1407, the process of setting "19" in the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then the present setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1304, the setting process for each opening is executed in step S1305.

In each opening setting process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, it is first determined in step S1501 whether or not the continuation flag is stored. This process is the same as the process of step S1402. If the continuation flag is stored, the open / close pattern of this round is set to A1 in the following step S1502. That is, in the case of the 16R continuation mode, the opening / closing pattern of the pattern having the longest opening time is set in all the opening times (RC2) in all rounds (RC1). Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, the maximum number of winnings is likely to occur in each round. In the present embodiment, in the open / close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the player continues to the next round even if the V prize is not won (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

If the continuation flag is not stored in step S1501 and the continuation rate fluctuation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1503. In step S1503, the second round counter RC2 is grasped, and the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened in one round is grasped. Then, in step S1504, the open / close pattern table is referred to from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and the corresponding open / close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are set in step S1505.

In the following step S1506, a process of setting the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 corresponding to the value of the second round counter RC2 this time is executed. In this process, the above-mentioned first distribution counter and the above-mentioned second distribution counter provided in the above RAM 114 are used. Then, with reference to the opening / closing pattern table, the operation patterns of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are grasped, and the values corresponding to the timings of displacement from the non-distribution state to the distribution state are input. As described above, these distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at predetermined intervals and become predetermined values (for example, "0"), so that the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (non-distribution state → It is possible to grasp that it is the timing (distribution state). Then, in the closing process (step S1321) and the closing time setting process (step S1324 and step S1325), which will be described later, the distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (distribution state → non-distribution state) and non-displacement. The value corresponding to the period for maintaining the minute state is input to the same distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of displacement (non-distribution state → distribution state) again.

After executing the process of step S1502 or after executing the process of step S1506, the process of subtracting "1" from the second round counter RC2 is executed in step S1507, and then the present setting process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24), after executing the setting process for each opening in step S1305, the opening process is executed in step S1306. Specifically, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is started to open the opening / closing accessory 168. Then, the release command is set in step S1307, and the main opening / closing process is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In this release command, in addition to information on whether or not the 16R continuation mode is set, the number of rounds of opening (information on the first round counter RC1) and the number of times of opening in one round (second). Information on the round counter RC2) and information on the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are included. In the effect control device 82, based on the received open command, the effect of notifying the opening / closing pattern, the winning rate of the accessory device 150, the high or low of the V winning rate when the winning of the accessory device 150 occurs, etc. The content is determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

If the opening / closing accessory 168 is being opened in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1308 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". When the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150 based on the detection state of the inlet sensor 179. If no prize has been awarded, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter PC is subtracted by "1" in step S1310, and then in step S1311, whether or not the V prize has occurred is detected by the V prize sensor 192. Judgment by.

If a V prize has been generated in step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the continuation flag is stored, and whether or not the 16R continuation mode is open / closed execution mode is grasped. Then, if V winning has not occurred in step S1311, or if the 16R continuation mode is set in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313, and it is determined whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". .. If it is not "0" and the maximum number of winnings in one round has not been reached, the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308, when the winning counter PC becomes "0" in step S1313, and further, V winning occurs in the continuation rate fluctuation mode in step S1312. In this case, each process for closing the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed in steps S1314 to S1328.

That is, when the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1313 and the maximum number of winnings has been reached, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the continuation flag is stored. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1312. When the continuation flag is not stored and the continuation rate fluctuation mode is set, the process of clearing the first round counter RC1 to "0" is executed in step S1315. This process is a process for terminating the open / close execution mode when the maximum number of winning round games is reached without the occurrence of V winning in the continuation rate fluctuation mode.

On the other hand, if the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308, or if the winning counter PC becomes "0" in the 16R continuation mode in step S1314, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, a process of subtracting "1" from the second round counter RC2 is executed. Then, in step S1317, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “0”. If a V prize is generated in the continuation rate fluctuation mode in step S1312, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to "0" is executed in step S1318. This process is a process for terminating the round game when a V prize is generated in the middle of the round game in the continuation rate fluctuation mode.

When it is determined in step S1317 that the second round counter RC2 is "0", or after the processing of step S1318 is executed, it is assumed that one round is completed in step S1319, and the first round counter RC1 is set. "1" The process of subtracting is executed. Then, in step S1320, a process of storing the round update flag in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. The round update flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round.

When the process of step S1315 is performed (when the maximum number of winnings in one round is reached without V winning occurring in the continuation rate fluctuation mode), when the second round counter RC2 is not "0" in step S1317. , And, when the process of step S1320 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1321 after any of the above. In step S1321, the closing process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the opening / closing accessory driving unit 173 is terminated, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed.

Then, in step S1322, it is determined whether or not the first round counter RC1 is "0" and it is the final round of the open / close execution mode. If the first round counter RC1 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1323 to determine whether or not the above round update flag is stored. If the round update flag is stored and each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round, the process proceeds to step S1324.

In step S1324, the closing time (closing period, waiting period) setting process between each round is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 sec) is input to the timer counter T.

On the other hand, the round update flag is not stored in step S1323, and each process for closing this time corresponds to each opening (closing) in one round (corresponding to the second round counter RC2). In that case, the process proceeds to step S1325. In step S1325, a closing time (closing period, waiting period) setting process for each opening is executed. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above-mentioned open / close pattern table, the current closing time (closing period, waiting period) is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to that time is set as the timer counter. Enter in T.

After executing the process of step S1324 or step S1325, the close command is set in step S1326, and the main opening / closing process is terminated. This set closing command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This closure command contains information on whether each process for this closure corresponds to the end of one round or for each opening and closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1322 that the first round counter RC1 is "0", the ending start process is executed in step S1327. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. In this case, the waiting time information differs depending on the type of open / close execution mode (16R continuation mode or continuation rate fluctuation mode), so that the 16R continuation mode has a longer waiting time for ending than the continuation rate fluctuation mode. Wait time information is set. Further, in the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time for the ending becomes longer as the opening / closing execution mode continues for a longer time (the number of round games is larger). By doing so, even if the open / close execution mode ends with a small number of round games, it is possible to move to the next game immediately, and it is expected that the next open / close execution mode will occur. It is possible to switch the player's feelings to do so. In other words, as the number of round games increases in this open / close execution mode, the waiting time for the ending can be lengthened, so that the time for the player to be immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. The value of the waiting time information set here is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

Then, in step S1328, after setting the ending command, the main opening / closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the staging control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This ending command includes information such as the waiting time for the ending set in step S1327, the type of open / close execution mode, and the number of times the round game is continued. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so that the display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 23), after executing the open / close process in step S1211, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1213. It is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1214. In this process, a process for returning the game state after the open / close execution mode to the normal game state (normal game state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial positions.

As a normal gaming state, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening / closing mode is easier to win a prize in the second operating port 39 than in other states). In addition, when the game state in which the type and probability of the game result at the time of winning the winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 changes (for example, the probability of the direct hit result changes) is provided, the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is preferable to configure the game state to be set in the transition process of.

After the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S1214 is completed, the end process of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S1215, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the continuation flag or the like used during the open / close execution mode is deleted. Further, in step S1215, information that one open / close execution mode has ended is output externally, such as by stopping the jackpot signal output in 1209. As a result, the hall computer of the game hall can grasp the start and end of one open / close execution mode.

The relationship between the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2 in the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the present embodiment is described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. explain. For details of each opening / closing pattern, refer to FIG. 28 again.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA1 (RC2 = 1 to 10), the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at the timing of t2 after that (after 0.1 sec), the displacement from the distribution state to the non-distribution state is performed. In this situation (RC2 = 1 to 10), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

In the situation of this operation pattern VA1, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A1, the open state is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is maintained until the timing of t6 (after 1.8 sec). .. In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (0.1 sec) to the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is very small. In the pattern, it is unlikely that the first distribution member 300 distributes to the off side.

On the other hand, in the situation where the operation pattern is VA1, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is t3 earlier than the timing of t6. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (0.1 sec) to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the ratio of the opening / closing pattern A1. It is larger than the case, and the possibility of being distributed to the outside by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern A1. However, since the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state for a short period of time, the winning probability of the accessory device 150 is lower than that of the opening / closing pattern A1. Considering the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 when winning, the opening / closing pattern A1 is the opening / closing pattern B1 (C1) in the situation where the operation pattern is VA1. ), The V winning rate is higher.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA2 (RC2 = 11 to 16), the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, at the timing of t4 after that (after 1.0 sec), the displacement from the distribution state to the non-distribution state is performed. In this situation (RC2 = 11 to 16), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

In the situation of this operation pattern VA2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A1, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state for the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The ratio of the period (1.0 sec) is larger than that of the operation pattern VA1, and the possibility of being distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the operation pattern VA1. ..

On the other hand, in the situation where the operation pattern is VA2, when the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B2 (RC2 = 11 to 13), the displacement is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is changed from the timing of t3. Is maintained until the late t4 timing (after 1.0 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (1.0 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the ratio of the opening / closing pattern B1. It becomes larger than the case, and the possibility of being distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern B1. However, since the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is longer than that of the opening / closing pattern B1, the probability of winning the accessory device 150 is higher than that of the opening / closing pattern B1. Considering the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 when winning, the opening / closing pattern B2 is the opening / closing pattern B1 (C1) in the situation where the operation pattern is VA2. ), The V winning rate is higher.

Further, in the situation where the operation pattern is VA2, when the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B1 (C1) (RC2 = 14 to 16), it is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is the above t3. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state to the period (0.2 sec) in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is the opening / closing pattern B1. It is larger than the case of B2, and the possibility of being distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening / closing patterns B1 and B2 in the operation pattern VA1. Further, since the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is shorter than the opening / closing pattern B2, the winning probability of the accessory device 150 is lower than that of the opening / closing pattern B2. Further, in the case of this operation pattern VA2, the opening / closing timing and the opening / closing state of the opening / closing accessory 168 are maintained for the same period as in the case of VA1, but in the case of VA2, the opening / closing accessory 168 starts from the open state. Since there is a period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state even after switching to the closed state, for example, in a game ball that wins a prize in the accessory device 150 just before the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the closed state. Even if there is, there is a possibility that it will be distributed to the off side by the first distribution member 300 after that. Therefore, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the V winning probability of B1 is lower than that of the opening / closing pattern B2, and the V winning probability of VA2 is lower than that of VA1 even if the opening / closing pattern B1 is the same.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA3 (RC2 = 17 to 19), the first distribution member 300 does not operate, so there is no possibility that the first distribution member 300 distributes to the off side. .. On the other hand, in this period, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is switched from VB1 to VB2, and there is a possibility that the second distribution member 310 distributes to the V winning side. Specifically, in the operation pattern VB2, the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state from the non-distribution state at the timing of t4, which is 1.0 sec after the timing of t1 in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace to. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec, and the distribution state is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

In the situation where the operation patterns are VA3 and VB2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is A2 (C2), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is the timing of t4. It is maintained until (after 1.0 sec). In this case, if the game ball has won a prize in the accessory device 150 just before the opening / closing accessory 168 is closed, it may be subsequently distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310.

On the other hand, in the situation where the operation patterns are VA3 and VB2, if the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is B3, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is the timing of t3 ( It is maintained until after 0.2 sec). In this case, even if the game ball enters the accessory device 150, the interval between the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state. In this pattern, it is unlikely that the second distribution member 310 will distribute to the V winning side.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By displacing the opening / closing accessory 168 provided in the accessory device 150 from the closed state to the open state, the game ball can win the accessory device 150, and the V winning sensor in the accessory device 150 can be won. In the configuration in which the rounds of the opening / closing execution mode are continued by being detected by 192, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is different in each round. As a result, the continuation rate (V winning rate) of each round can be changed without changing the operation timing of each accessory (distribution member 300, 310, rotating body 201, etc.) provided in the accessory device 150. It is possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In each round game in the open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode, rounds (open / close patterns B and C) having a lower V winning probability than the other rounds (open / close pattern A) are provided. This makes it possible to draw attention to whether or not to continue to the next round, especially in this round, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention.

The next round of the opening / closing pattern round having a low V winning probability is a round having an opening / closing pattern having a higher V winning probability. As a result, if the round with a low V winning probability is passed, it is easy to continue the next round, and the attention to the round with a low V winning probability can be further increased.

In the opening / closing pattern of each round, the V winning probability was different depending on the number of opening / closing times of the opening / closing accessory 168. As a result, in one round game, it is possible to perform a game such as which number of times the V is won and whether the V is easy to win, and it is possible to improve the interest.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state is made different, so that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is made different. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the winning / failing determination based on winning the first operating port 38 and the winning / failing determination based on winning the second operating port 39 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the result table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 has a result table for the first actuating port (FIG. 30A) and a result table for the second actuating port. The result table (FIG. 30 (b)) is stored. Since the result table for the first operating port is the same as the result table in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the result table for the second operating port, as a game result, a special opening A result and a special opening B result are set in addition to the disengagement result, the direct hit result, and the normal opening result. The special opening A result and the special opening B result are the same number of times as the normal opening result (twice), and the first opening timing is the same as the normal opening result (according to the opening type counter CS). The length of the period for maintaining the first open state, the length of the period for maintaining the closed state, and the length of the period for maintaining the second open state are set to be different.

Specifically, in the case of a normal opening result, the period during which the open state is continued is uniformly 2.0 sec, and the waiting period during which the closed state between the first opening and the second opening is maintained is maintained. Is uniformly 1.0 sec. On the other hand, in the case of the special open state A result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TC1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TC3 (). 0.7 sec), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is the period TC2 (1.2 sec). Further, in the case of the special open B result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TD1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TD3 (0.3 sec). ), And the waiting period between the first and second open states is the period TD2 (1.5 sec).

The period during which the first open state is maintained and the period during which the second open state is maintained are set in step S902 in the control process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S902, a process of referring to the game result that triggered the opening of this time and inputting a numerical value corresponding to the opening period of this time to the opening period counter is executed based on the result. Further, the waiting period between the first and second open states is set in step S909 in the control processing (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S909, the game result that triggered the opening of this time is referred to, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the waiting period of this time into the waiting period counter is executed.

In the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the normal opening result, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the special opening A result. The relationship between the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the special opening B result is shown.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded at the timing of t1, after a period corresponding to the value of the opening type counter CS (step S802), the opening / closing accessory is opened / closed at the timing of t2. 168 is displaced to the open state. Then, this open state is maintained for 2.0 sec, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t9. If the prize generated at the timing of t1 is the prize for the second operating port 39 and the result is two normal opening, the opening / closing accessory 168 is at the timing of t10, which is the timing 1.0 sec after the timing of t9. Displace to the open state. Then, this open state is also maintained for 2.0 sec, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t14.

Explaining the operation of each distribution member 300, 310, as described above, the operation timing setting and drive control of each distribution member 300, 310 are the first distribution setting in step S803 in the control start process (FIG. 19). The process is performed in the second distribution setting process in step S804, the first distribution control process in step S1002 in the distribution process (FIG. 21), and the second distribution control process in step S1004.

The first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t2 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state (after the lapse of the first period after the open state), and 1.5 sec. This distribution state is maintained for the (second period). Then, at the timing of t5, the displacement from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. If the opening this time is the result of two opening times, the non-displacement state is maintained for 1.0 sec (fifth period) from the timing of t5, and the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 after that is t10. It is displaced to the distribution state again at the timing (after the lapse of the first period after the open state). This distribution state is also maintained for 1.5 sec (second period), and is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t11.

The second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t7, which is 1.8 sec (third period) after the timing of t2 when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. .. This distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8. If this opening is the result of two opening times, 0.6 sec (sixth period) from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10, and after the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened at the timing of t10. The non-distribution state is maintained for 1.8 sec (third period). Then, the non-distribution state is displaced to the distribution state at the timing of t12, the state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and the state is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t13.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, when the operating openings 38 and 39 are won at the timing of t1, the value of the opening type counter CS After a period corresponding to (step S802), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2. This operation is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned normal opening result.

When the game result is the special open A result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TC1) from the timing of t2, and the game is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t4, which is 1.2 sec (period TC2) after the timing of t3, the displacement is made from the closed state to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.7 sec (period TC3), and at the timing of t9, the open state is displaced from the closed state to the closed state, and the second opening is completed.

When the game result is the special open B result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TD1) from the timing of t2, and the game is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t6, which is 1.5 sec (period TD2) after the timing of t3, the displacement is made from the closed state to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.3 sec (period TD3), and at the timing of t8, the open state is displaced from the closed state to the closed state, and the second opening is completed.

Here, even when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the operation timings of the above-mentioned distribution members 300 and 310 are the same. Therefore, the ratio of the period in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state / non-distribution state with respect to one opening period in the opening / closing accessory 168 is the normal opening result, the special opening A result, and the special opening B result. Is different.

Specifically, in the normal opening result, the ratio of the first distribution member 300 to the distribution state in one open state (for example, t2 to t9, t10 to t14) is 15/20, and the second distribution is performed. The ratio of the dividing member 310 in the distribution state is 1/20.

On the other hand, in the case of the special opening A result, the ratio of the first distribution member 300 in the distribution state in the second opening state (t4 to t9) is 2/7, which is the result of the normal opening. Lower than the case. Further, the ratio of the second distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/7, which is higher than the case of the above-mentioned normal opening result.

In the case of the special opening B result, the ratio of the first distribution member 300 in the distribution state in the second opening state (t6 to t8) is 0/3, which is lower than that in the case of the normal opening result. Further, the ratio of the second distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/3, which is higher than the case of the above-mentioned normal opening result.

As described above, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, distribution to the off-side can occur, and when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, distribution to the V winning side is possible. Can occur. Therefore, as described above, if the probability of being distributed by the first distribution member 300 is lower than the normal opening result as in the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the probability of occurrence of the V prize is high. Further, if the probability of being distributed by the second distribution member 310 is higher than the normal opening result, the probability of occurrence of V winning is higher.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are changed by changing the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state. It is possible to change the probability that a V prize will occur when a prize is won in the accessory device 150 without doing so.

In addition, the number of times the normal opening result is opened (2 times) based on the winning of the second operating port 39 and the number of times the special opening A result and the special opening B result are opened (2 times) are set to the same number. Since it is not necessary to increase the pattern of the number of times of opening and closing, the storage capacity can be reduced.

The timing at which the opening / closing accessory 168 is started to open based on the winning of the second operating port 39 is the same timing as the other normal opening results (opening type counter) even if it is the special opening A result or the special opening B result. Timing according to the value of CS). As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of launching a game ball at the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, that is, a so-called stop hit.

It should be noted that the special opening A result and the special opening B result may be notified by the symbol display device 51 or the like at a timing prior to the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. By doing so, for example, it is easy to win a V prize in relation to the relationship between the rotation position of the rotating body 201 and the period required to reach the lead-out unit 186 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310. Compared with the configuration that notifies the difficulty of decency after the winning of the accessory device 150 occurs, the ease of winning the V and the difficulty of deciding the timing before the winning of the accessory device 150 It is possible to do it with. By doing so, it is possible to further attract attention to the movement (flowing mode) of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the high and low V winning rates have been described in relation to the normal opening result and each special opening result, but the concept of the present invention can be applied even if the V winning rate is changed as follows. Therefore, in the modified example shown in FIG. 32, the high and low of the V winning rate will be described in relation to each special opening result and the distribution members 300 and 310 (particularly the second distribution member 310).

In this modification, the special opening A result, the special opening B result, and the special opening C result are set as the special opening result. Each of the special opening A to C results is the result of performing the opening operation twice, as in the case of the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the above-described embodiment. The results of the special openings A to C may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the first operating port 38, or may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the second operating port 39. It may be sorted.

In the special opening A result in the modified example shown in FIG. 32 (a), the value of the opening type counter CS is based on the winning (distributed above) to any of the operating ports 38 and 39 generated at the timing of ta1. After a lapse of time according to the above, the first opening operation is performed at the timing of ta2 (the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the opened state).

In this modification, the second distribution member 310 as the distribution member that changes the V winning rate is distributed 1.4 seconds after the timing of t2 (timing of ta7), which is a predetermined period. It is assumed that the state is displaced and the state is maintained for 0.4 sec (displaces to the non-distribution state at the timing of ta9).

In the first opening operation of the special opening A result, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TE1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of ta3 (opening / closing accessory 168). Displaces in the closed state). Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta7, which is 1.2 sec (period TE2) after the timing of ta3 (the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state). After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TE3) after the timing of ta7 (the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state).

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TF1) from the timing of ta2, and the opening operation is maintained at the timing of ta3. The opening operation of the second time is completed. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta6, which is 0.8 sec (short) 0.8 sec (period TF2) different from the above period TE2 from the timing of ta3. After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of ta8, which is 0.5 sec (period TF3) after the timing of ta6.

The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification is the same as the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TG1) from the timing of ta2, and the ta3 The first opening operation is completed at the timing of. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta4, which is 0.5 sec (short) 0.5 sec (period TG2) different from the period TE2 and the period TF2 from the timing of ta3. After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of ta5, which is 0.2 sec (period TG3) after the timing of ta4.

In these cases, the special opening A result overlaps with the situation where the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state from the timing of ta7 where the open state is maintained in the second opening operation to the timing of ta9. If a prize is generated in the accessory device 150 in this situation, the prize is distributed to the V prize side by the second distribution member 310.

In the special opening B result, in the second opening operation, the period in which the opening state is maintained is longer than the special opening A result (period TE3 <period TF3), while the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the opening state. The overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is the period from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta8, and the situation in which the overlap occurs is higher than in the case of the special opening A result. It gets shorter. As a result, even if a prize is generated in the accessory device 150, it is not distributed to the V winning side as in the above special opening A result, but is distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 depending on the winning timing. It depends on whether or not it is possible. More specifically, if a prize is generated in the accessory device 150 during the final period of the second opening operation, it is distributed to the V winning side, and other than that, it is not distributed to the V winning side.

In the special opening C result, in the second opening operation, the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state do not overlap. As a result, even if a prize is generated in the accessory device 150 in the second opening operation, distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

As described above, by setting the opening operation timing of each special opening A to C result, the probability of V winning can be made different.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 32 (b), the second distribution member 310 has the same total period in which the open state of the special open A to C results is maintained in the modified example shown in FIG. 32 (a). The opening / closing timing is set so that the probability of distribution to the V winning side differs depending on the method.

That is, as in the case of FIG. 32 (a), the second distribution member 310 is at the timing of tb8, which is a predetermined timing 1.4 sec after the timing of tb2, which is the first opening timing. Displace to the distribution state. Then, at the timing of tb10, which is 0.4 sec later, the displacement is made to the non-distribution state.

In the first opening operation of the special opening A result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TH1) from the timing of tb2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb3. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb8, which is 1.2 sec (period TH2) after the timing of tb3. After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TH3) after the timing of tb8.

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TI1) from the timing of tb2, and the opening operation is maintained at the timing of tb3. The second opening operation is completed. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb7, which is 0.9 sec (short) 0.9 sec (period TI2) different from the above period TH2 from the timing of tb3. After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of tb9, which is 0.4 sec (period TI3) after the timing of tb7.

The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification is different from the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and is different from the above period TH1 and the period TI1 from the timing of tb2 (long) 0.4 sec (period TJ1). ), And the first opening operation is completed at the timing of tb4. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb5, which is 0.3 sec (short) 0.3 sec (period TJ2) different from the period TH2 and the period TI2 from the timing of tb4. After that, the second opening operation is completed at the timing of tb6, which is 0.2 sec (period TJ3) after the timing of tb5.

In these cases, the total period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state in the special opening A result is TH1 + TH3 (0.6 sec), and in the case of the special opening B result, it is TI1 + TI3 (0.6 sec), which is special. In the case of the open C result, it is TJ1 + TJ3 (0.6 sec), and the total period of the open state is the same regardless of the special open A to C results.

As described above, even when the opening / closing timing of each special opening A to C result is set so that the total period of the open state is the same, the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The overlap between the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is in the order of special opening A result> special opening B result> special opening C result. As a result, it is possible to make the V winning rate different in relation to the operation timing of the second distribution member 310 without making the winning rate itself for the accessory device 150 different in each opening result.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the method of setting the opening / closing pattern of each round in the opening / closing execution mode is different from the first and second embodiments. Therefore, the setting process of each round in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33 (a). As already described, the setting process for each round is a process executed in step S1304 of the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), and is activated when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened. It is a process.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the setting process for each round in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 25 in the description of the first embodiment. The difference is that when it is determined in step S1402 that the continuation flag is not stored, in each of the above embodiments, a process for setting a predetermined round pattern in steps S1403 and S1404 is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1402, a lottery process for determining a round pattern by lottery is executed in step S1408. In this lottery process, a lottery counter for a round pattern is acquired from various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and a lottery table for a round pattern is acquired from various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. The lottery counter for the round pattern is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is updated at a predetermined cycle, and can acquire random numerical information.

The lottery table for the round pattern can determine the current round pattern according to the value of the lottery counter for the round pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), for example, the lottery table is set so that the current round pattern differs depending on the previous round pattern. That is, the selection rate of the pattern A, which is the easiest to continue the round as the current round pattern, differs depending on the previous round pattern, and if the previous round pattern is the pattern A, the pattern A is selected at 50%. In other cases, pattern B or pattern C, which makes it difficult to continue the round, is selected, whereas if the previous round pattern is pattern B or pattern C, which makes it difficult to continue the round, pattern A is almost selected (in pattern B, pattern B is selected). 80%, 90% for pattern C). In the first round of the open / close execution mode, a predetermined pattern may be set, or a random pattern may be set by lottery or the like.

Then, after the processing of step S1408 is performed, the corresponding round pattern setting processing is performed in step S1405, and then the processing of steps S1406 and subsequent steps is executed.

By configuring the round pattern to be determined by lottery or the like for each round as described above, the opening pattern of each round becomes more diverse in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game can be diversified. In the above embodiment, in the next round of the pattern (patterns B and C) where it is difficult to continue the round, the round of the pattern (pattern A) where it is easy to continue the round is set so that it is easy to select. Even if it is a round that is disadvantageous to the person, if it is overcome, the next round will be advantageous to the player, so even the disadvantageous round can be absorbed in the game. On the contrary, the next round of the pattern that makes it easy to continue the round is set so that it is easy to select the round that makes it difficult to continue the round, so it is possible to make the game fair without significantly increasing the ball ejection rate. Become.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the round pattern from the next time onward is set according to the timing when the V prize is generated as the condition for continuing the round is satisfied.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing process in the present embodiment, which is basically the same as the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the mode is the continuous fluctuation mode, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in this embodiment, the step is performed. A process of grasping the timing at which the V prize is generated in S1329, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. It is configured in.

After storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in step S1329, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processing after step S1319 is executed.

The setting process for each round in the present embodiment is configured to execute the round pattern lottery process for each round as shown in FIG. 33 (a) in the third embodiment. As the lottery table (distribution table) of the round pattern in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the previous round pattern, the above-mentioned second round counter RC2, and the above-mentioned second round counter RC2 are used. The next round pattern is set to be different depending on the value of. More specifically, when the previous round is a round of pattern A in which it is easy to continue, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the next round, the second round counter RC2 is more than 1 to 16. In the case of 17 to 19, it is easier to select the pattern A, which makes it easier to continue the round.

That is, in the previous round, when the condition for continuing the round is satisfied by the number of opening and closing of the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening and closing of the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) are performed. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player in the next round than when the condition for continuing the round is satisfied by the number of times.

By doing this, even if the conditions for continuing the round are not easily met and the player may feel uneasy, if the round is continued at the end of the round, it will be advantageous, and the feeling of anxiety and the next It can be a game that enjoys the balance with the advantage of the round.

In particular, in the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19) of the pattern A, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is likely to occur, so that the condition of continuing the round is not satisfied in the pattern A until the final stage. However, at the end of the round, the condition for continuing the round is likely to be satisfied, and the occurrence of an event such as the opening / closing execution mode ending without satisfying the condition for continuing the round is suppressed. Therefore, as described above, in a game that enjoys balance, it is considered that the player will be highly interested in the timing of the V prize so that the V prize is generated at the end of the round as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), when comparing the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (11 to 16) at the time of pattern A, the first half continues the round in the next round than the second half. The easy pattern A is set so that it is easy to select, and the first half is set so that the next round is more advantageous than the second half.

In each of the above embodiments including this embodiment, if the condition for continuing the round is satisfied in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode, the following is the following even if the maximum number of winnings (9) in one round is not reached. Since the structure is such that the game shifts to a round, it is considered that the player is interested in winning the V prize with the winning number as close to the upper limit as possible. Then, for example, if a V prize is won at a stage where the number of prizes is small, the player may feel that the round has been lost due to the relationship with the maximum number of prizes. Therefore, as mentioned above, the case of winning V in the first half of the round, which is probably the stage where the number of winnings is relatively small, is the next time, compared to the case of winning V in the second half of the round, which is the stage where the number of winnings is larger than that. If the round is configured to be advantageous to the player, even if the round feels that the player has lost as described above, the configuration is to secure it, and the player's dissatisfaction is raised. It will be something that can be resolved.

In the lottery (distribution) table at the time of pattern B shown in FIG. 35 (b) and the lottery (distribution) table at the time of pattern C shown in FIG. When a V prize is generated, it is easy to select pattern A, which makes it easy to continue the round in the next round. More specifically, as already explained, in pattern B, the opening / closing pattern is set so that the V prize can occur in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16), and if the V prize occurs at that timing, the V prize is set. The next round is likely to be a pattern A round, which is advantageous for the player. Further, in pattern C, an opening / closing pattern is set so that a V prize can occur at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), and if a V prize occurs at that timing, the next pattern is advantageous for the player. It tends to be a round of A. On the other hand, in pattern B, in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19) of the round, it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize in the first place. Further, in the pattern C, similarly, in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round, it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150 in the first place. Therefore, with the above configuration, the points that the player pays attention to can be aggregated, and the inflection of the game can be added.

The lottery table for each pattern is only an example, and may have other configurations. For example, if a V prize is generated at a timing in which a prize is unlikely to occur in the pattern B or the pattern C, if the setting is made to be advantageous to the player (so that the pattern A can be easily selected), the prize device 150 is won. Even in a situation where the occurrence of ..

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the variation of the opening pattern is different in the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, as the opening pattern in the present embodiment, a pattern D or a pattern E is set in addition to or in place of the patterns A to C.

In pattern D, in the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round, a prize may occur in the accessory device 150, and there is a sufficient possibility of a V prize. However, the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the winning rate for V are set lower than those in the pattern A.

Then, at the end of the round in pattern D (RC2 = 17 to 19), the maintenance period of the open state is set to be longer than that of pattern A, and the winning rate and V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are set to pattern A. Pattern D is set higher than that. Therefore, at the end of the round, the condition for continuing the round is more likely to be satisfied with pattern D than with pattern A, and while suppressing the ease with which the condition is satisfied in the first half and the second half of the round as described above, the condition for continuing the round is finally continued. Can be satisfied. Therefore, in the pattern D, the condition of continuing the round is likely to be satisfied near the upper limit of the number of winnings, and in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode, the pattern is more advantageous for the player than the pattern A.

In the pattern E, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), the period in which the open state is maintained is set longer than that in the pattern A. Therefore, the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are higher than those in the pattern A, and the condition for continuing the round is likely to be satisfied during this period. On the other hand, in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 10 to 16), it is set so that the winning of the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur, and the opening / closing timing is the same as that of the pattern B1 in the pattern B and the pattern C1 in the pattern C. It has become.

At the end of the round in pattern E (RC2 = 17-19), the open state maintenance period is set longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and there is a sufficient possibility of winning the accessory device 150. Further, if the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the maintenance period of the open state, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is the opening / closing timing that can occur.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (e), the round pattern lottery table (distribution table) in the present embodiment corresponds to the values of the previous round pattern and the second round counter RC2. The next round pattern is set to be different.

The difference from the fourth embodiment is that in the lottery (distribution) table of each pattern A to C, an example of being distributed to pattern D and pattern E is added, and the pattern D and pattern E are different from each other. The point is that a lottery (distribution) table is set. Here, the features of the lottery tables of Pattern D and Pattern E will be described in detail.

In the lottery table of pattern D, if the continuation conditions of the round are satisfied in the first half and the second half (RC = 1 to 16) of the round, it is difficult to select patterns A, D, and E that are easy to continue the round, and it is difficult to continue the round. B and C are easy to select. On the other hand, when the continuation condition of the round is satisfied at the end of the round (RC = 17 to 19), the pattern A, which facilitates the continuation of the round, is easily selected. As described above, in the first half and the second half of the round, a prize may occur in the accessory device 150, but since the continuation condition is set to be less likely to be satisfied than in the pattern A, the prize is won in the first half and the second half. However, it is possible to entertain the situation where the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied (V prize is unlikely to occur). Then, at the end of the round in the pattern D, the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are increased, so that the continuation condition is easily satisfied. Therefore, in pattern D, in the first half and the second half of the round, the prize is won up to the maximum number of prizes in the round, and the prize is awarded so as to reach the maximum number of prizes in the final stage, or the V prize is given. It becomes possible for a person to control to some extent. Therefore, it can be expected that the player will actively participate in the game.

In the lottery table of pattern E, if V winning occurs in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10) where winning the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, patterns B and C, which are difficult to continue the round, are easily selected and the round is continued. It is difficult to select patterns A, D, and E that are easy to remove. On the other hand, when a V prize is generated at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19) where a prize is likely to be generated in the same accessory device 150, the pattern A which is easy to continue the round is easily selected. Therefore, even if the number of times of opening and closing is likely to cause a prize in the accessory device 150, the game is to select whether to win in the first half or in the final stage in relation to the continuation rate of the next round. It is possible to let people participate in the game.

Further, in the pattern E lottery table, if a V prize is generated in the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16) where it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150, it becomes easy to select a pattern A or a pattern E which makes it easy to continue the round. ing. In relation to this point and the selection rate when a V prize is generated in the final stage, depending on the number of rounds, it may be advantageous for the player to aim for a prize in the accessory device 150 from the latter half. Therefore, even in a situation where it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150, it is possible to give rise to the significance of launching the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the so-called stopping action.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. First, the staging process executed by the MPU 142 of the staging control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The staging process is a process that is started in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect processing, processing for executing various effects is performed based on the command from the main control device 81. Incidentally, the RAM 144 of the effect control device 82 is provided with a reception command storage area that can store the command received from the main control device 81. The area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

By the way, in the staging process, first, it is determined in step SB101 whether or not the release command is received. As described above, the open command is a command output from the main control device 81 at each open in each round in the open / close process in the open / close execution mode. If it is determined in step SB101 that the release command has been received, the release correspondence process is executed in step SB102. This process will be described in detail later, but is a process for executing special notification at a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode.

If a negative determination is made in step SB101, or after the process of step SB102 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB103. In step SB103, it is determined whether or not a normal release command has been received. As already explained, in the normal opening command, a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39 during the normal gaming state, and the opening operation of the opening / closing accessory 168 occurs as if the lottery result based on the winning result is a direct hit result or a missed result. This is a command output from the main controller 81 (when the result is a normal opening result or a special opening result) except when the command is not set. If it is determined in step SB103 that the normal release command has been received, the normal release correspondence process is executed in step SB104. Incidentally, this normal opening command includes information such as the content of the lottery result set by the main control device 81, the number of times of opening, and the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. In this normal opening correspondence process, based on the information of the received command, the opening number notification that notifies the opening number when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won, and the opening notification as an effect when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened, etc. Execute the process for performing the production.

If a negative determination is made in step SB103, or after the process of step SB104 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB105. In step SB105, as another process, another command received from the main control device 81 (a shift command including information on winning a prize in a normal game state or a shift of hold information, a miss command indicating a game result, or a direct hit command). , And the contents of the command based on the control end command, the prize-winning command in the character, the opening command, the closing command, the ending command, etc. related to the control of the opening / closing execution mode, which are output when the accessory device 150 is controlled. A display content command is output to the display control device 100 so as to execute the effect according to the above, and a process for displaying and controlling the symbol display device 51 is executed. Further, in step SB105, for example, if an operation means for effect (effect button or the like) is connected to the effect control device 82, an effect for responding to the operation (effect for operating the effect button) is executed. .. Further, in step SB105, control for performing the effect for the demo screen is performed, and other controls for various effects are executed. Then, after the process of step SB105 is executed, the present effect process is terminated.

Next, the content of the special notification in the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern in an opening / closing execution mode added or changed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 39 (b) is a flowchart showing an opening corresponding process, which is FIG. 39. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of various special effects performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as a special notification.

First, as shown in FIG. 39A, in the present embodiment, as the opening / closing execution mode opening pattern, pattern C and pattern F whose opening / closing timing differs depending on the value of the number of opening times (RC2) are set. .. As already explained, in the pattern C, in both the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) of the round, the opening and closing accessory 168 is difficult to win the accessory device 150. Works. Then, at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at a timing at which V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can occur.

In the pattern F, in the first half of the round (RC2 = 1 to 10), the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at an opening / closing timing in which it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150, as in the pattern C. The operation timing is the same as that of the pattern C. Therefore, in the first half of the round, it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish whether the round pattern of the pattern C is selected or the round pattern of the pattern F is selected.

In the latter half of the round (RC2 = 11 to 16) in the pattern F, unlike the above pattern C, the opening / closing accessory 168 operates at the opening / closing timing at which a prize is likely to occur in the accessory device 150. That is, in the latter half of the round, unlike the pattern C, a prize is generated in the accessory device 150, and a V prize may be generated as a condition for continuing the round.

In pattern F, at the end of the round (RC2 = 17 to 19), V distribution may occur as in pattern C, but the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is the pattern. It is longer than in the case of C, and the winning rate for the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are also higher than in the pattern C.

As described above, when the pattern C and the pattern F are compared, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the same opening / closing pattern for the first half of the round, and as a result, the player can see from the opening / closing pattern. It is difficult to identify which pattern C or F is the round of. On the other hand, in the latter half and the final part of the round, the pattern F is overwhelmingly more advantageous for the player than the pattern C.

Therefore, such a change in the situation is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. As a process for that purpose, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), an open response process corresponding to the open command output from the main control device 81 is executed during the open / close execution mode. By the way, the opening command output from the main controller 81 includes information on the type of open / close execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous fluctuation mode), and the release command output at each release includes this time. It is assumed that the information on whether the opening is the opening command at the start of the round or the opening command corresponding to each opening number in the round, the numerical information of the first round counter RC1 and the numerical information of the second round counter RC2, etc. are included. , These information can also be grasped on the effect control device 82 side.

In the opening correspondence process, first, in step SB201, a process of determining whether or not the opening pattern this time is pattern C or pattern F is executed. If it is not the pattern C or the pattern F, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is. In the case of the pattern C or the pattern F, it is determined in step SB202 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “11”. As described above, when the second round counter RC2 is 1 to 10, the opening / closing member operates in the same opening / closing pattern as the pattern C and the pattern F, and after the second round counter RC2 becomes "11", the pattern is displayed. A difference in the opening / closing pattern between C and the pattern F occurs. Therefore, if the second round counter RC2 is not "11" in step SB202, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is, and if it is "11", the process proceeds to step SB203.

In step SB203, it is determined whether or not the pattern is C. If the pattern F is used instead of the pattern C, the process proceeds to step SB204, the display control device 100 is controlled so that the symbol display device 51 executes the special effect A, and then the corresponding processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB203 that the pattern is C, the process proceeds to step SB205, the display control device 100 is controlled so that the symbol display device 51 executes the special effect B, and then the corresponding processing is performed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the special effect A, for example, on the display screen G, "lucky! Chance to continue! "Is displayed. In the special effect B, for example, on the display screen G, "... ... (Sorry) "is displayed. In the case of the present embodiment, even if the pattern C is used, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed at the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19) of the round, so that the player can perform V distribution at the final stage. In the above special production B, "... Do not give up until the end!" Is displayed so as to notify that an advantageous situation exists.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is the same until the middle of the round, and the opening / closing pattern (pattern F) that is advantageous to the player from a predetermined timing is more disadvantageous than that. An opening / closing pattern (pattern C) is provided, and the symbol display device 51 notifies which pattern is used at the predetermined timing. By doing so, it is difficult to identify which pattern of the round is up to the predetermined timing, and it is possible to draw attention to the special notification at the predetermined timing.

In particular, since the situation is disadvantageous for the player (a situation in which it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize) until a predetermined timing, is the disadvantageous situation for the player continuing at the predetermined timing, or an advantageous situation? It is thought that the players will be highly interested in whether it will change to.

In the above embodiment, if the selectivity between the pattern C and the pattern F is more easily selected in the pattern F than in the pattern C in the open / close execution mode of the continuous variation mode, it is assumed that a situation disadvantageous to the player usually continues. , When the special notification A is performed (when the pattern F is selected), the unexpected feeling can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to feel the benefit of the special notification A being performed.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing during the normal gaming state. As the special notification during the normal gaming state, a first special notification suggesting to adjust the launch timing of the game ball and a second special notification are set. The details of each of these special notifications will be described in detail later, but by performing each special notification, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the rate of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are performed. And are set to increase.

As a condition for executing these special notifications, in the present embodiment, for example, depending on the round continuation timing during the opening / closing execution mode, the mode shifts to a mode in which it is easy to execute the special notification advantageous to the player and a mode in which it is not. And. These modes will be described in detail later, but first, a process related to grasping the round continuation timing related to the transition of the mode will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an opening / closing process in the present embodiment.

The opening / closing process in the present embodiment is basically the same as the opening / closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above embodiments. The difference is that when a V prize is generated in step S1311 and it is determined in step S1312 that the mode is the continuous fluctuation mode, the process proceeds to step S1318 in each of the above embodiments, whereas in this embodiment, the step is performed. A process of grasping the timing at which the V prize is generated in S1329, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. It is configured in. This is as described in the fourth embodiment.

After executing the process of step S1329, the process of adding the value of the second round counter RC2 grasped in step S1329 in step S1330 to the value of the total round counter TRC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. To execute. The total round counter TRC is a counter for storing the integrated value of the timing (RC2 value) at which the round continuation condition is satisfied by V winning in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode.

Then, after executing the process of step S1330, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processes after step S1319 are executed.

Further, in the opening / closing process in the present embodiment, the value of the total round counter TRC in the current opening / closing execution mode is output to the effect control device 82 side at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, that is, at the ending. That is, after the ending start processing is executed in step S1327, the processing of reading the value of the total round counter TRC from the various counter areas 114d is executed in step S1331, and in step S1328, the total is described in response to the ending command. Set the value of the round counter TRC.

As described above, the ending command is output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82, and the process corresponding to the command is performed in the other process (step SB105) of the effect process (FIG. 38). Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, in the other processing, the special notification of the symbol display device 51 is executed according to the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command based on the reception of the ending command. Performs processing to switch display modes with different rates.

As the display mode, a normal mode, a relief mode, and a special mode are set. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), the relief mode has the highest execution rate as the execution rate of the special notification when a special opening result is obtained based on, for example, a prize in the second operating port 39 during the normal gaming state. , Relief mode, special mode, and normal mode are set so that the execution rate of special notification increases in this order. In this case, in the staging control device 82 that has received the ending command, if the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command is 1 to 50, it is set to the relief mode, and if it is 51 to 150, it is set to the normal mode. If it is 151 to 285, the special mode is set.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, if the condition for continuing the round is satisfied and the timing of occurrence of the V prize is early, it is easy to set the relief mode, and if it is late, it is easy to set the special mode. If the V prize is generated early, it is highly possible that the maximum number of prizes has not been reached. Further, if the value of the total round counter TRC is small, it is highly possible that the open / close execution mode is completed in a short number of rounds. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode is set to the relief mode in which the special notification is more easily executed than usual. By doing so, it is possible to relieve the player who did not obtain many benefits in the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, as described above, if a V prize is generated in the latter half (RC2 = 11 to 16) or the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19) in each round and the round continuation condition is satisfied, it is treated in an advantageous manner for the player (next). The pattern of the round is likely to be set to a pattern with a high continuation rate), and the player tries to operate so as to generate a V prize in the latter half or the end of the round as much as possible. As a result, the value of the total round counter TRC can also be high, so the display mode is set to a special mode in which special notification is more easily executed than usual, according to the efforts of the player. By doing so, it is possible to expect the player to actively participate in the game.

Since the special mode is only for expecting the active participation of the player, the special mode has a lower execution rate of the special notification than the relief mode. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game without increasing the ball ejection rate too much.

The state in which the special notification is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (c). Here, the description will be given based on the special opening A result described in the modified example of the second embodiment and the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), it is assumed that a prize is generated in the operating openings 38 and 39 at the timing of t1, and the game result is the special opening A result. In this case, the first opening operation is started at the timing of t2 and ends at the timing of t3. Further, the second opening operation is started at the timing of t5 and ends at the timing of t6.

Here, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 in a predetermined launch cycle (0.6 sec, Pa) by operating the launch handle 60. For example, as a situation where the operation of the launch handle 60 is continuously performed, the game ball is launched at the timing of P1, the next game ball is launched at the timing of P2 after that Pa, and then P3 after that Pa. It is assumed that the game ball is fired at the timing of, and further, the game ball is fired at the timing of P4, which is Pa later.

First, to explain the case where the special notification is not performed, in relation to the firing cycle Pa, for example, the game ball launched at the timing of P1 wins the accessory device 150 in the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A. (Timing of t2). In that case, it is assumed that the game ball arrives at the second distribution member 310 at the timing of t4, which is after the period required for the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 to reach the second distribution member 310. Then, at this timing, the second distribution member 310 is not in the distribution state, and V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

Further, for example, it is assumed that the game ball launched at the timing of P4 reaches the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening operation (timing of t6). In this case, although the second distribution member 310 is reached at the timing of t7, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed because the displacement from the distribution state to the non-distribution state has already been performed.

Next, a case where special notification is performed will be described. When a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39 at the timing of t8, for example, "Wait a minute !!" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the first special notification. Based on this display, the player stops firing the game ball. If the game result based on the winning at the timing of t8 is the special opening A result, the first opening operation is started at the timing of t9 and ends at the timing of t10. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of t12 and ends at the timing of t14.

In this case, when the game ball is launched at the timing of P5, which is the timing before the start of the second opening operation, the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing of t12, and the winning game ball wins. The second distribution member 310 is reached at the timing of t13, and as a result, V distribution is performed and V winning may occur. In this case, at the timing of t11, which is a timing slightly before the timing of P5 (0.1 sec, period PC), as a second special notification, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, for example, "Now, hit. The message "Te !!" is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts the firing operation, and as a result, the game ball is fired at the timing of P5, and as described above, V winning may occur. As a player, the firing operation of the game ball has been stopped for a period of Pb longer than the firing cycle Pa.

As described above, as the special notification, the V winning rate, that is, the transition rate to the opening / closing execution mode can be changed by performing the special notification instructing the launch operation of the game ball in relation to the opening operation. Then, by realizing this by the staging side without changing the operation timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, the distribution members 300, 310, and the rotating body 201, the basic configuration as a gaming machine is not changed. It is possible to easily adjust the ball ejection and change the specifications of the gaming machine.

By performing the first special notification as described above, the period for stopping the firing of the game ball may be lengthened. Therefore, for example, in the period from the first special notification to the second special notification, instead of stopping the launch of the game ball, the timing when the second special notification should be performed (the timing of P5) is calculated back and slightly. Even if the firing is stopped and then the firing of the game ball is continued, the timing of performing the second special notification may be adjusted so that the V prize may occur.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, in a situation where the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to be small (TRC = 1 to 50), the game is played in the opening / closing execution mode by setting the configuration to shift to a state advantageous for the player. It is possible to make up for the fact that the benefits obtained by the person were small.

Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, even in a situation (TRC = 151 to 285) in which the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to be large, the configuration is such that the player shifts to an advantageous state, so that the opening / closing execution mode is simply performed. It is possible not only to make the accessory device 150 win a game ball, but also to pay attention to the winning timing (the timing when the V winning occurs), etc., and to further encourage the player to actively participate in the game. ..

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation start timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 are changed as follows. That is, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed to the winning timing of the operation ports 38 and 39.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is started based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the operation pattern thereof is uniformly set. Specifically, the first distribution member 300 distributes from the non-displacement state at the timing when the first period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) elapses from the timing when the winning to the first operating port 38 occurs. When the second period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) elapses from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing when the third period (3.3 sec in this embodiment) elapses from the timing when the winning to the first operating port 38 occurs. Then, when the fourth period (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) elapses from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. In the case of the second operating port 39, the operation pattern is the same as the operation pattern at the time of winning the first operating port 38, and specifically, the first period and the second period (third period). And the operation pattern until the lapse of the 4th period) is the same, and after that (after the lapse of the 2nd period or the 4th period), the operation of the 1st period and the 2nd period (the 3rd period and the 4th period) is performed again. The pattern is repeated. By doing so, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is determined and then the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 is determined as in each of the above embodiments. ..

On the other hand, if the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39, for example, the second distribution member is set from the winning timing to the operating ports 38 and 39. There is a concern that a so-called stop-and-shoot action will be performed, aiming at the distribution to the V winning side by 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set from the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 as described above, as described in the first embodiment, the opening and closing is performed. By leaving a configuration in which the opening start timing of the accessory 168 is random, it is possible to prevent such a stop action from being performed. Further, it is possible to intentionally change the V winning rate on the gaming machine side by adjusting the opening start timing while trying to randomize the opening start timing in this way. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described in detail.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting process in the present embodiment. As described above, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process executed in step S802 of the control start process (step S506, FIG. 17) in the game control process (FIG. 16) of the normal process, and is a process executed during the normal game state. This is a process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 when a prize is awarded to 38 and 39.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S1601, a process of acquiring an open timing table from the open timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is executed. As the opening timing table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, a first opening timing table and a second opening timing table are set.

As shown in FIG. 43A, the first opening timing table is the same as the opening timing table (FIG. 11C) in each of the above embodiments, from the start timing of this process to the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168. The open waiting time is set to random (0.5 sec to 2.4 sec) according to the open type counter CS. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43B, the second opening timing table includes the first distribution member 300 (off distribution) and the second distribution member in a situation where the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The opening standby time is set according to the relationship with the operation of 310 (V distribution). The second open timing table is more likely to generate a V prize than the first open timing table. The second opening timing table will be described in detail later, but like the first opening timing table, the opening waiting time is set to be different depending on the opening type counter CS.

Which opening timing table is selected depends on, for example, the gaming state at the time of starting this process (when winning a prize is generated in the operating ports 38 and 39). Specifically, the second open timing table is selected or selected until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the predetermined open / close execution mode (for example, the open / close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode). After the end condition is satisfied, the first opening timing is easily selected or easily selected. As the end condition, for example, a configuration or a predetermined configuration that is established when the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened (number of operations) or the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). It is conceivable that the configuration is established by shifting to the open / close execution mode (for example, the open / close execution mode that becomes the continuous fluctuation mode).

After any of the opening timing tables is selected in step S1601, the opening type counter CS is acquired in step S1602, and the corresponding opening timing (opening standby time) is set in step S1603. After that, the main opening / closing timing setting process is terminated.

The details of each opening timing table selected in step S1601 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44 in addition to FIG. 43.

First, the relationship between the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the opening standby time of the opening / closing accessory 168 will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

For example, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38 at the timing of t1, the first distribution member 300 is after the lapse of the first period (1.5 sec) from the timing of t1 when the prize is generated. It is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state at the timing of t3, and then displaced from the distributed state to the non-distributed state at the timing of t6 after the lapse of the second period (1.5 sec) thereafter. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t7, which is after the lapse of the third period (3.3 sec) from the timing of t1 when the winning is generated, and then. At the timing of t8, which is after the lapse of the fourth period (after 0.1 sec), the displacement state is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state.

The opening waiting time is determined based on the winning of the first operating port 38, for example, the opening waiting time is shorter than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 (for example, 0. When set to 5 sec), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 after the lapse of the first waiting time from winning, and then a predetermined period (2.0 sec, step S902) is set. The open state is maintained throughout (see), and the displacement is changed to the closed state at the timing of t5. In this case, in the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state (off-distribution period) overlaps, and the length of the period is 1.0 sec. It becomes. Further, there is no overlap with the period (V distribution period) in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state.

On the other hand, the opening waiting time determined based on the winning of the first operating port 38 becomes the second waiting time (for example, 2.4 sec) longer than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. When set, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4 after the lapse of the second waiting time from the winning, and then the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened for a predetermined period (2.0 sec). The state is maintained, and the state is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t10. In this case, in the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the detachment distribution period with the first distribution member 300 overlaps, but is shorter than the case where the first standby time is set, and that period. The length of is 0.6 sec. Further, the V distribution period with the second distribution member 310 overlaps, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec.

The operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 when the second operating port 39 is won are repeated when the first operating port 38 is won, so detailed explanations will be given. Although omitted, the first distribution member 300 is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t6 and then displaced to the distribution state at the timing of t11 after the lapse of the first period. Then, the displacement to the non-distribution state is performed again at the timing of t14, which is after the lapse of the second period from the timing of the t11. The second distribution member 310 is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8 and then displaced to the distribution state at the timing of t15 after the lapse of the third period. Then, the displacement to the non-distribution state is performed at the timing of t16, which is after the lapse of the fourth period from the timing of the t15.

The opening waiting time is determined based on the winning of the second operating port 39. For example, when the opening waiting time is the first waiting time, the out-of-order distribution period or the V distribution period for the first opening is set. Is the same as when winning a prize in the first operating port 38. At the timing of t5 when the first opening ends, the waiting time between the first opening and the second opening is set, and this time becomes a predetermined period (1.0 sec, see step S909). ing. Then, the second open state is set at the timing of t9 when the waiting time elapses, and the open state is maintained for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, see step S902). Then, at the timing of t13 when the period elapses, the displacement is made to the closed state. As described above, when 0.5 sec is set as the first standby time, the deviating distribution period at the time of the second opening is 1.1 sec, which is longer than that of the first time. Further, even at the time of the second opening, there is no overlap with the V distribution period.

When the opening waiting time determined based on the winning of the second operating port is the second waiting time, the above-mentioned first operation is performed for the out-of-order distribution period and the V distribution period for the first opening. It is the same as when winning a prize in the mouth 38. The waiting time between each opening is set at the timing of t10 when the first opening is completed (1.0 sec, see step S909), and the displacement is displaced to the open state at the timing of t12 when the period elapses. Then, at the timing of t17 when the period in which this open state is maintained (see step S902 in 2.0 sec) elapses, the displacement is made to the closed state. In this way, when 2.4 sec is set as the second standby time, the off-distribution period at the time of the second opening is 0.6 sec, which is the same length as the first time. Further, even at the time of the second opening, the overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the case of the first time.

In this way, the lengths of the off-distribution period and the V-distribution period may differ depending on the set open waiting time. Then, in the present embodiment, in the second open timing table, the V winning rate is changed by utilizing the overlapping relationship with the out-of-order distribution period or the V distribution period.

That is, when the open waiting time is set from 0.5 sec (first timing) to 1.0 sec (second timing), the period overlapping with the deviating distribution period gradually becomes longer (1.0 sec → 1.5 sec). ). Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 will be distributed to the out-of-order side is higher when the opening standby time is set to 1.0 sec than when it is set to 0.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate is low. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, as shown in FIG. 43B, the opening type counter is such that the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 1.0 sec is lower than the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 0.5 sec. The value of CS is assigned.

Further, when the opening standby time is set from 1.0 sec (second timing) to 1.3 sec (third timing), the length of the overlapping period with the deviated distribution period does not change (the longest 1. It remains at 5 sec), and there is no overlap with the V distribution period. Therefore, the value of the open type counter CS is assigned so that the probability set in these open waiting times is lower than the probability set in other times.

If the opening standby time is set to 1.4 sec (fourth timing) or later, which is later than 1.3 sec (third timing), overlap with the V distribution period occurs. Therefore, although the length of the overlapping period with the off-distribution period is the same as the length when the longest overlap occurs, the open waiting time is 1.4 sec as the period in which the overlap with the V distribution period occurs. From (fourth timing) to 1.5 sec (fifth timing), the value of the open type counter CS is higher than the probability set in the above 1.0 sec to 1.3 sec (second timing to third timing). Is allocated.

When the opening standby time is set from 1.5 sec (fifth timing) to 2.4 sec (sixth timing), which is later than 1.4 sec (fourth timing), the period overlapping with the out-of-order distribution period gradually increases. It becomes shorter (1.5 sec → 0.6 sec). Further, if it is set in this period, any overlap with the V distribution period occurs, and the length thereof does not change at 0.1 sec. Therefore, the probability that the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 will be distributed to the out-of-order side is lower when the opening standby time is set to 2.4 sec than when it is set to 1.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate is high. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, the value of the opening type counter CS is assigned so that the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 2.4 sec is higher than the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 1.5 sec.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set to a constant operation from the timing when the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded, and then the operating ports 38 and 39 are awarded. Since the opening waiting time from the opening / closing bonus 168 to the opening is changed, it is possible to change the probability of V winning in the bonus device 150.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the probability of winning V, the operation pattern after the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state is a uniform pattern. That is, although the V winning probability is changed as described above, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 does not require a large change, and the waiting time before opening (opening standby time) may be changed. It has become. By doing so, it is possible to make the V winning rate different with a simple configuration.

As for the opening timing table, the first opening timing table and the second opening timing table are provided, but a table may be provided in addition to these, or only the second opening timing table may be provided. Further, in the second opening timing table, the opening waiting time at which the V winning rate is high is easily selected, but the opening waiting time at which the V winning rate is low may be easily selected.

The configuration may be such that which opening timing table is selected is determined by a lottery or the like. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of winning the lottery (the probability of selecting the second opening timing table) changes according to the gaming state.

The open timing table selected according to the game state at the time of digestion of the hold information based on the winning of the operating ports 38 and 39 has a different configuration, but the open timing selected according to the game state at the time of acquisition of the hold information. The tables may have different configurations. For example, with respect to the hold information acquired during the open / close execution mode, if the second open timing table is selected or easily selected, the hold information is acquired during the open / close execution mode. It is possible to induce a series of villas and improve the interest. In particular, for example, if a prize is not easily generated for the accessory device 150 in the opening / closing execution mode, the player is likely to feel dissatisfied that it is difficult to obtain a prize ball even in the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, if the hold information acquired during the open / close execution mode is treated advantageously as described above, even if it is difficult for the accessory device 150 to win a prize during the open / close execution mode, the spilled ball is used. As a result, it is possible to realize a new playability such that the opening / closing execution mode itself becomes easy to stay in a row, as well as alleviating the above dissatisfaction.

Further, for the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is a predetermined number (for example, 2) or more, if the second open timing table is selected or easily selected (handled advantageously), the hold information is held. It is possible to bring about the merit of getting a lot of information. In the first place, the more likely it is that the operating ports 38 and 39 are won, the more likely it is that the accessory device 150 will be won, and as a result, the opening / closing execution mode is also likely to occur. Further, if the configuration is more advantageous as the platform in which the hold information is easily stored as in the above configuration, the platform in which the opening / closing execution mode is more likely to occur in the platform in which the operating ports 38 and 39 are more likely to be won. It is possible to increase or decrease the number of balls released, and it is possible to improve the interest. Further, for example, the operation of the accessory device 150 is set to be long, the length of the game times (variable display time) at the time of digesting the hold information is set to be long, and the winning (hold) to one operation port 38, 39 is set. The longer the period from the digestion of information) to the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is set, the easier it is for the reserved information to be accumulated. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a so-called stopping action of stopping the firing of the game ball until the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is likely to be performed. Therefore, if the above-mentioned configuration that is more advantageous for the platform on which the pending information can be easily stored is applied to such a configuration, it is possible to make it meaningful to store the reserved information, and it is possible to deter the above-mentioned stopping action. It will be possible.

On the contrary, for the reserved information acquired when the number of reserved information is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the second open timing table may be selected or easily selected (advantageously treated). .. By doing so, even if a prize is not easily generated in the operating ports 38 and 39, it is possible to relieve it. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the act of repeatedly launching and stopping the game ball may be easily performed so as to make it difficult to store the hold information. Therefore, when the above configuration is adopted, for example, when the launch of the game ball is continued for a predetermined period or more and the number of reserved information is less than the predetermined number, it is preferable to treat it advantageously.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of player relief (relief that V prizes do not easily occur), the number of prizes (number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after the opening / closing execution mode of one is completed as the game state. Depending on the configuration, the ease of selection of the second opening timing table changes, specifically, the number of winnings (number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode of one is a predetermined number or more. If this is the case, the second open timing table may be selected or easily selected. By doing so, it is possible to relieve the so-called fitting table in which the opening / closing execution mode does not easily occur, and it is possible to make it meaningful to continue the game even with such a fitting table.

From the viewpoint of player relief, the advantage of holding information at the time of digestion changes depending on the number of winnings (number of games) to the operating ports 38 and 39 after the opening / closing execution mode is completed as described above. For example, the advantage may be changed according to the occurrence rate of the open / close execution mode per unit time, or the advantage may be changed depending on the type of the previous open / close execution mode (for example, than the 16R continuation mode). It may be configured (to increase the advantage in the case of an unfavorable continuous fluctuation mode), or whether or not a V prize is generated at the time of digestion prior to the current hold information (for example, the previous hold information) or the accessory device 150. The advantage may be changed depending on whether or not a prize is won.

Further, as a configuration for changing the advantage (changing the V winning rate) at the time of digesting the reserved information, a configuration for changing the opening / closing waiting time as in the present embodiment may be used, or as in the second embodiment described above. The advantage may be changed by making it easy / difficult to select the special opening result.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are constant from the digestion timing of the reserved information, while the symbol changes on the main display unit 43 when the reserved information is digested. The display is executed, and the opening / closing accessory 168 is started to be opened after the variable display is completed. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the game control process in the present embodiment. As described above, the game control process is a process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 15) that is periodically started.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If the open / close execution mode is in progress, the game control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not it is in the accessory control state. If it is not in the accessory control state, the process proceeds to step S1703. The processing of steps S1701 and S1702 is the same as the processing of steps S501 and S502.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the symbol is started on the main display unit 43 based on the fact that the hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment of the hold information is the said. With the end of the variable display as one game, the variable display of the game times is sequentially executed for each reserved information. Then, in step S1703, when the counter corresponding to the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process (step S1706) described later is not a predetermined value (for example, "0"), one game is performed. Determined to be running. It should be noted that, at the start of the execution of one game round, the flags corresponding to the various flag storage areas 114e are stored, and the flags are deleted at the end of the one game round. It may be configured to determine whether or not one game is being executed.

If one game is being executed, the game control process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the process for controlling the bonus is not executed even when the open / close execution mode, the bonus control state, or one game is being played.

If one game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is “0”. If it is "0", the game control process is terminated as it is. This process is the same as the process of step S503.

If the common hold number CRN is not "0" in step S1704 and there is (undigested) hold information that is not the target of the pass / fail determination, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the data setting process is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S504, and processes for sequentially targeting the values of various counters C1, C2, CS, etc. for the undigested pending information as the target of the pass / fail determination are executed.

In the following step S1706, the variable display time setting process is executed. In the variable display time setting process, the value of the current common hold number CRN and the value of the open type counter CS for the hold information this time are acquired, and these values are stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. By comparing with the stored fluctuation display time table, the fluctuation display time of the game times this time is specified, and the specified fluctuation display time is displayed on the counter for the fluctuation display time provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Executes the process of entering information.

In the variable display time table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the variable display time of each game is set to be different according to the value of the common hold number CRN, and the common hold number CRN is set. The variable display time is set to be shorter as the value increases, that is, as the number of stored pending information increases. When the value of the common hold number CRN is the same, which variation display time is set is randomly set in increments of 0.1 sec according to the value of the open type counter CS. For example, when the common hold number CRN is "0", one of the variable display times of 1.0 sec to 2.4 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 1. .7 sec. When the common hold number CRN is "1", one of the fluctuation display times of 0.7 sec to 1.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 1.1 sec. Is. When the common hold number CRN is "2", one of the variable display times of 0.5 sec to 1.3 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 0.9 sec. Is. When the common hold number CRN is "3" or more, one of the variable display times of 0.1 sec to 0.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is the average value. It is 0.3 sec.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are set so that the shorter the period from the digestion timing of the reserved information as the occurrence of a predetermined event, the higher the V winning rate. Specifically, among the distribution members 300 and 310, as the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310, the non-distribution state is displaced to the distribution state in 0.3 sec as the third period from the digestion timing of the reserved information. However, the state is maintained for 1.0 sec as the fourth period. After that, the non-distribution state is maintained until the next pending information digestion timing. The setting of this operation pattern is set in the distribution setting process (second distribution setting process in step S804) in the control start process (FIG. 19) and the distribution process (FIG. 21) already described. Further, since the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is the same as that of each of the above embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of step S1706, the pass / fail determination process (same as step S505) is executed in step S1707, the control start process (same as step S506) is executed in step S1708, and then the game control process is performed. finish. If it is determined in step S1702 that the accessory control state is in progress, the control process (same as step S507) is executed in step S1709, and the distribution process (same as step S508) is executed in step S1710. It is executed, the winning process (similar to step S509) is executed in step S1711, and then the game control process is terminated.

The relationship between the length of the variable display time of the game times and the V distribution in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). In FIG. 46B, the average value of the variable display time that can be selected according to each common hold number CRN is shown as an example.

When the hold information is consumed at the timing of t1, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t2, which is 0.3 sec after the third period as described above. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 1.0 sec, which is the fourth period, and returns to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

When, for example, 1.7 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "0", the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t6 which is 1.7 sec later. We (the game times are executed), and the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of t6. For example, when the game result is an open result (once), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t6, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the open state is maintained at the timing of t9. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting an open waiting period of 1.7 sec from the digestion of the reserved information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t6 as a predetermined event. .. In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state does not occur, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

When, for example, 1.1 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "1", the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4 which is 1.1 sec later. We (the game times are executed), and the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t4. For example, when the game result is the opening result (once), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the open state is maintained at the timing of t8. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting an open waiting period of 1.1 sec from the digestion of the reserved information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t4 as a predetermined event. .. In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.2 sec) from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than that timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. I can't.

When, for example, 0.9 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "2", the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3, which is 0.9 sec later. We (the game times are executed), and the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t3. For example, when the game result is an open result (once), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t3, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the open state is maintained at the timing of t7. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting an open waiting period of 0.9 sec from the digestion of the reserved information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t3 as a predetermined event. .. In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.4 sec) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than that timing (a timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. I can't. The period in which the period in which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap is "2" as compared with the case where the common hold number CRN is "1". Is longer in the case of. That is, there is a higher possibility that V distribution will be performed when the common hold number CRN is "2" than when it is "1".

When, for example, 0.3 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is "3" or more, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is displayed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, which is 0.3 sec later. It is performed (the game round is executed), and the game result is displayed as a stop result at the timing of the same t2. For example, when the game result is an open result (once), the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the open state is maintained at the timing of t5. Displace to the closed state. In other words, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting an open waiting period of 0.3 sec from the digestion of the reserved information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 as a predetermined event. .. In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (1.0 sec) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t5. If a prize is won, V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. The period in which the period in which the prize can be awarded to the accessory device 150 and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap is longer than when the common hold number CRN is "1" or "2". Also, the case of "3" or more is longer. That is, there is a higher possibility that V distribution will be performed when the common hold number CRN is "3" or more than when it is "1" or "2".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display time of the game times tends to be shortened as the number of common hold numbers CRN increases, and the V winning rate increases as the variation display time decreases. Since the operation patterns of, 310 are set, the probability that V winning will occur increases as the holding information is stored more. With such a configuration, in a situation where hold information is likely to be accumulated, for example, during the open / close execution mode, a V prize is generated after that (after the open / close execution mode), and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode again. It is possible to configure the structure so that villas are likely to occur. In addition, the easier it is to acquire hold information, the easier it is for V prizes to occur (it is easier to shift to the open / close execution mode), and the range of increase / decrease in the ball ejection rate becomes wider, making it possible to improve interest. Become.

Further, in the case of a configuration having a high-frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 39a is frequently opened, a prize is generated in the second operating port 39 by setting the high-frequency support mode. Since it becomes easy, the common hold number CRN becomes easy to accumulate. That is, it becomes easy to shift to the open / close execution mode. By doing so, it is possible to substantially change the transition rate to the open / close execution mode without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310, and it is possible to diversify the game.

In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the V winning rate is different by changing the variable display time of each game round has been described, but the period from the digestion timing of the hold information to the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed. The configuration for making the opening / closing accessory 168 has the same meaning as the configuration for changing the opening standby time as in the second and third embodiments, and any configuration up to the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168. The effect of changing the period can be expected.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the end of the open / close execution mode is regarded as the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the distribution members 300 and 310 periodically operate after the end of the open / close execution mode. do.

Specifically, in the transition process (step S1214) at the end of the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), the period (first period and first period) in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are maintained in the non-distribution state. The configuration is such that the setting (the process of inputting the numerical information corresponding to the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47, in the normal processing in the present embodiment, the distribution processing (step S508 in FIG. 16) is executed as one of the normal processing. That is, the same processing as the processing of the above steps S401 to S404 is executed in steps S1801 to S1804, and the distribution processing is executed in step S1805. The processing of steps S1806 to S1810 is the same as the processing of steps S405 to S409.

Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, in the game control process (step S1803) in the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned distribution process is performed by the normal process, after the controlled process in step S507 is executed, the game control process is performed. The winning process is executed in step S509, and the game control process is terminated.

In the distribution process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S1901 whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main distribution process is performed as it is. To finish. This is because the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the open / close execution mode is set by the game state transition process (FIG. 23). If it is determined in step S1901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, similarly to step S1001, it is determined whether or not it is the first distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the first distribution counter is grasped, and the first period (the period for maintaining the first distribution member 300 in the non-distribution state) or the second period (the first distribution member 300 is distributed). It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the period for maintaining the state). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, in step S1903, the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or from the distribution state to non-distribution state, as in step S1002. The first distribution drive unit 300a is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. Further, in step S1903, a process of setting the numerical information corresponding to the period for maintaining the displaced state in the first distribution counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, or after the process of step S1903 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, similarly to step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the second distribution control timing. That is, the numerical information of the second distribution counter is grasped, and the third period (the period for maintaining the second distribution member 310 in the non-distribution state) or the fourth period (the second distribution member 310 is distributed). It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the period for maintaining the state). Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, in step S1905, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state, or from the distribution state to non-distribution state, as in step S1004. The second distribution drive unit 310a is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. Further, in step S1905, a process of setting the numerical information corresponding to the period for maintaining the displaced state in the second distribution counter is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the process of step S1905 is executed, the main distribution process is terminated.

Next, the control start process (step S506) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, the control start process is a process that is started when the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is started in the game control process (FIG. 16).

First, in step S2001, a process of grasping the number of times of opening and closing is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S801. In the following step S2002, a process for grasping the distribution status of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a and the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the current state of the first distribution member 300 is different from the distribution state. The process of grasping which of the distribution states is and the information of the remaining period in which the state continues is executed. In the following step S2003, a process for grasping the distribution status of the second distribution member 310 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a and the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the current state of the second distribution member 310 is not the distribution state. The process of grasping which of the distribution states is and the information of the remaining period in which the state continues is executed.

In the following step S2004, the opening / closing timing setting process for setting the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, and then the control start process is terminated.

Specifically, in the processing of step S2004, the probabilities that the off-distribution by the first distribution member 300 and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are performed are different based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003. Set the open standby time. The state in which the opening standby time is set will be described with reference to FIG. 50. In FIG. 50, for example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t1, the drive control of the first distribution member 300 is periodically performed every time the first period or the second period elapses, and the third operation is performed. The configuration in which the drive control of the second distribution member 310 is periodically performed every time the period or the fourth period elapses is shown.

A prize is generated at the timing of t2, the number of times of opening is grasped as one in step S2001, the first distribution member 300 is in the non-displacement state in step S2002, and then (at the timing of t3). It is assumed that the displacement to the distribution state is grasped, and that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state and then displaced to the distribution state (at the timing of t6) in step S2003. .. In this case, the out-of-order distribution by the first distribution member 300 is easy to be performed, and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is difficult to be performed, that is, the V winning rate is low. , The first waiting time is set as the opening waiting time. Specifically, for example, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to be in the open state at the timing of t4 during the period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, and that state is maintained until the timing of t6. To set. When set as described above, the first distribution member 300 deviates from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 and the period during which the bonus device 150 can be won (the period from the timing of t4 to the timing of t6). It overlaps with the period during which the distribution is performed, and does not overlap with the period during which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed.

On the other hand, a prize is generated at the timing of t8, the number of times of opening is grasped as one in step S2001, the first distribution member 300 is in the non-displacement state in step S2002, and then (timing of t9). In step S2003, the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distribution state, knowing that it is displaced to the distribution state and then (at the timing of t10) it is displaced to the non-distribution state. After that, it is assumed that the displacement to the distribution state is grasped (at the timing of t11). In this case, for example, due to the gaming state (the number of common hold numbers CRN) or a predetermined lottery, unlike the case of the timing of t2, the first distribution member 300 is less likely to perform the out-of-order distribution, and The second standby time is set as the opening standby time so that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is easily performed, that is, the V winning rate is high. For example, the opening / closing accessory 168 is set to be in the open state at the timing of t11, which is the period after the first distribution member 300 is displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state, and the state is the timing of t15. Set to be maintained until. When set as described above, the first distribution member 300 deviates from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 and the period during which the bonus device 150 can be won (the period from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15). Although it overlaps with the period in which the distribution is performed, the ratio of overlapping with the period in which the deviated distribution is performed is smaller than in the case where the first waiting time is set. Further, the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period during which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13 overlap, and the first standby time is set. The rate of overlap with the period in which V distribution is performed is larger than in the case of. That is, the V winning rate is higher when the second waiting time is set than when the first waiting time is set.

As described above, even in the configuration in which the distribution members 300 and 310 operate periodically, the V winning rate is different by differentiating the release waiting time from the digestion timing of the reserved information as the occurrence of a predetermined event. Is possible.

In the above configuration, the opening standby time is set to be different according to the operating conditions of the grasped distribution members 300 and 310, and the V winning rate is set to be different, but the opening is set so that the V winning rate is the same or substantially the same. It may be configured to set the waiting time. Specifically, the operating status of the distribution members 300 and 310 at the time of digesting the hold information is grasped, and the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period overlapping with the out-of-order distribution are determined in advance. As a configuration for setting the open waiting time so that the first overlapping period (first specific period) is set or the period overlapping with the V distribution is set to the predetermined second overlapping period (second specific period). May be good. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the act of aiming at the game ball and increasing the V winning rate according to the operating conditions of the distribution members 300 and 310 that operate periodically.

Further, in the above configuration, the game state at the time when the operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is grasped (for example, the number of reserved information stored as in the fourth embodiment and the game after the open / close execution mode). The opening standby time may be different so that the V winning rate differs depending on the number of times, the number of winnings to the operating ports 38, 39, the time using the RTC, etc.).

In the above configuration, not only the opening standby time but also the V winning rate may be different by changing the period during which the open state is maintained and the number of times of opening, as in the second embodiment.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotation position of the rotating body 201 at the time of occurrence of a predetermined event is grasped, and the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the grasping result. Hereinafter, as an example of the occurrence of a predetermined event, the time when the reserved information in the normal gaming state is digested will be described as the predetermined event.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing timing setting process in the present embodiment. As described above, the opening / closing timing setting process is a process (step S802 in FIG. 19) performed as a control start process (step S506) at the time of digesting the reserved information in the game control process (FIG. 16).

In the present embodiment, first, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same processing as in steps S801 to S804 is executed, the number of times of opening / closing is grasped, the opening / closing timing is set, and the operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set. .. In step S2102 of the present embodiment, the opening / closing timing is set in the same manner as in step S802, but as will be described later, the opening / closing timing may be changed after that, so the opening / closing timing is temporarily set. It can also be called processing.

In the following step S2104, a process of grasping the position of the current rotating body 201 is executed. More specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 196, a process of grasping the position of the V winning opening guide unit 204 in the rotating body 201 is executed. Then, in step S2105, based on the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102, the period during which the game ball can win the accessory device 150 is grasped, and when the game ball wins in that period, the game ball is released. The timing of reaching the out-licensing unit 186 is grasped, and based on the grasping result, a process of calculating the position of the rotating body 201 when the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the out-licensing unit 186 is executed. More specifically, it is assumed that it takes about 1.0 sec for the game ball that has won the prize in the character device 150 to reach the out-licensing unit 186 (note that during this period, the game ball that has won the prize in the character device 150 has won a prize. The period on the route in which the game ball reaches the out-licensing unit 186 without being distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310 is shown, and this route is also referred to as a normal route in the following description), and a prize is given to the accessory device 150. In the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is temporarily set to be in the open state and the timing is delayed by the above 1.0 sec, the V winning opening guide portion 204 in the rotating body 201 is positioned at any position. Whether or not they are arranged is calculated from the detection signal of the rotation position detection sensor 196.

In the following step S2107, a process of determining whether or not a V prize can be won by the normal route is executed based on the process result of step S2106. That is, assuming that the game ball that has won the prize in the accessory device 150 reaches the out-licensing unit 186 as a normal route, the position where the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 can receive the game ball that has reached the out-licensing unit 186 at that timing. Determine if it is located in. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if V winning is not possible on the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2108 to execute a change lottery process for changing the opening / closing timing. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, a lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and an opening / closing timing change lottery is executed based on these. By the way, the winning probability of this lottery is set to 10% in this embodiment.

In step S2109, it is determined whether or not the change lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S2108. If the change lottery has not been won, the main opening / closing timing setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed.

If it is determined in step S2109 that the change lottery has been won, the first opening / closing timing change process is executed in step S2110. In such a process, a process of changing the open / close waiting time is executed so that the V prize can be won by the normal route. More specifically, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 at the present time grasped in step S2105, the period required for the game ball to reach the out-licensing unit 186 by the normal route (about 1.0 sec), and Therefore, when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, it is possible to win the accessory device 150 at the timing when the V prize can be won by the normal route, and at the timing of the back calculation. The opening / closing standby time is changed so that the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state. After that, the main opening / closing timing setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2107 that V winning is possible by the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that distribution (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 is performed by opening the opening / closing accessory 168 at the timing temporarily set in step S2102. .. Specifically, when the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap, the second distribution member It is determined that V distribution by 310 may be performed. When it is determined that there is no possibility that V distribution will be performed, that is, when there is a possibility that V winning will occur on the normal route and there is no possibility that V distribution will be performed by the second distribution member 310. Ends the main opening / closing timing setting process as it is. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed.

When it is determined in step S2111 that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed, that is, when it is determined that there is a possibility of V winning in either the normal route or V distribution. , Step S2112. In step S2112, a process of temporarily changing the opening / closing timing (opening / closing standby time) temporarily set in step S2102 is executed. More specifically, for example, the opening / closing timing is temporarily changed so that the opening / closing control is started at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (0.5 sec) from the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102. In the following step S2113, it is determined whether or not V winning is possible by the normal route when the opening / closing pattern at the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112 is used. If it is determined in step S2112 that V winning is not possible on the normal route, that is, even if there is a possibility of V winning on the normal route or V distribution at the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102, step S2113 is performed. If there is no V prize in the normal route with the changed opening / closing timing, the opening / closing timing setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the opening / closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112 is not adopted, but the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2113 that the V prize can be won by the normal route even if the opening / closing timing is changed in step S2112, the second opening / closing timing changing process is executed in step S2114. Therefore, the main opening / closing timing setting process is terminated. In the second opening / closing timing changing process, the opening / closing waiting time is set (that is, the process of re-inputting the numerical information corresponding to the waiting period counter) so as to apply the opening / closing pattern temporarily changed in step S2112.

The state in which the opening / closing timing is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, and the opening / closing timing is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4. It is assumed that the temporary setting is performed (process in step S2102). FIG. 52A shows a case where the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and the overlap with the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state does not occur. ing. That is, in this case, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310. However, as a result of the rotating body 201 rotating until the game ball winning the accessory device 150 reaches the out-licensing unit 186, the game ball can be led out to the V winning opening guide unit 204 by the out-licensing unit 186. There is sex. That is, it is a case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and a negative determination is made in step S2111. In this case, the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed at the same opening / closing timing without changing the opening / closing timing temporarily set in step S2102.

In FIG. 51 (b), there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 as in the case of FIG. 51 (a), but unlike the case of FIG. 51 (a), V in the normal route. It shows the case where there is a possibility of winning. That is, it is a case where a negative determination is made in step S2107. In this case, if the change lottery is won after the change lottery process in step S2108, the first opening / closing timing change process is performed in step S2110.

As an opening / closing pattern after the change, in pattern 1, the opening / closing standby time is changed (delayed) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t2.1. The timing of t2.1 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V prize (timing from 5 to t6). Then, without changing the period during which the open / close accessory 168 is maintained in the open state, it is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlap timing with the V distribution (later than the timing from t5 to t6) t4.1. Displace to the closed state at the timing of. As a result, the time when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time when the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed overlap with each other.

The opening / closing pattern after the change is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as follows.

As the opening / closing pattern after the change, in the pattern 2, the opening / closing standby time is not changed from the timing of t2, and the period during which the opening / closing accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is changed (prolonged). The timing at which the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state remains t2, but the timing at which the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlap timing with the V distribution (from t5 to t6). Displace at the timing of t4.2 (later than the timing).

As an opening / closing pattern after the change, pattern 3 shows an example in which both the opening / closing waiting time and the opening / closing accessory 168 are maintained in the open state are changed. That is, in pattern 3, the opening / closing standby time is changed to the timing of t2.2, which is later than the timing of t2, and the timing of displacement to the closed state is changed to the timing of t4.2, which is later than the timing of t4. The timing of t2.2 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V prize (timing from 5 to t6).

As the opening / closing pattern after the change, in the pattern 4, the time when the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened by changing the number of opening / closing times and the time when the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed overlap with each other. An example of changing the opening / closing pattern is shown. In this example, the normal opening result, which is the number of times of opening once, is changed to the special opening result, which is the number of times of opening twice shown in the second embodiment, so that the overlap with the V distribution occurs. An example is shown. The opening / closing accessory 168 displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 is temporarily closed at the timing of t2.3, and then displaced to the open state again at the timing of t2.4 thereafter. The timing of t2.4 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V prize (timing from 5 to t6). Then, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4.2.

As an opening / closing pattern after the change, the pattern 5 shows an example of changing the opening / closing pattern so that the V prize can be won by the normal route from the positional relationship of the rotating body 201. More specifically, the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 at the present time is grasped, and the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 reaches the lead-out portion 186 from the rotation speed of the rotating body 201. The period is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the time required for the game ball winning the accessory device 150 to reach the out-licensing unit 186, the opening / closing timing at which the V winning is possible by the normal route is calculated back. For example, the opening / closing timing is changed so that the opening / closing timing is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.5 as the back-calculated opening / closing timing, and then displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4.3 thereafter.

It should be noted that each of the above change patterns is only an example, and may be configured to be changed to another opening / closing pattern. In short, if it is determined that V-winning does not occur on the normal route, the configuration may be changed to an opening / closing pattern that increases the possibility of V-winning.

In FIG. 53, when there is a possibility that a V prize may occur in both the normal route and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, that is, the affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and the affirmative determination is made in step S2111. Shows the case. For example, it is assumed that the hold information is digested at the timing of t1, and the opening / closing timing is temporarily set so that the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 (. Process of step S2102). Further, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and overlap with the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state occurs. Further, the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is also arranged at a position where V winning on a normal route is possible with the currently temporarily set opening / closing pattern.

In this case, in step S2112, as a temporary change process, for example, a process of temporarily changing the open / close standby time so as to be displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1 delayed by a predetermined time (0.5 sec) is executed. In this example, the timing of t2.1 is later than the timing at which V distribution is performed (timing from t3 to t4), and there is no possibility of V winning due to V distribution in the opening / closing pattern after the provisional change. Further, the opening / closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1, and then is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 in the same manner as described above. That is, in this example, the period during which the open state is maintained is shortened. Then, in step S2113, a process of determining whether or not V winning on the normal route is possible in the temporarily changed opening / closing pattern is performed from the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201, and the provisionally changed. If it is determined that the V prize can be won by the normal route even in the opening / closing pattern, the second opening / closing timing change process in which the temporarily changed opening / closing pattern is set as the current opening / closing pattern is executed in step S2114. As a result, the opening / closing timing is changed so that only the possibility of V winning on the normal route remains.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship with the position of the rotating body 201 at the time of digestion of the reserved information as a predetermined event, each distribution member. It is possible to change the V winning rate by taking into account not only the operation patterns of 300 and 310 but also the operation patterns of the rotating body 201, and it is possible to diversify the opening / closing patterns to be set. In this case, since only the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, the player feels unfair. It can be made difficult and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

Based on the grasping result of the position of the rotating body 201, it is determined whether or not V winning is possible in the normal route, and if it is not possible, the opening / closing pattern can be changed (the first opening / closing timing change process). It was configured (which can be executed). As a result, it is possible to improve the V winning rate by changing the opening / closing pattern, and it is possible to make the player expect the opening / closing execution mode.

Regarding this first opening / closing timing change process, a change lottery process is performed, and when the change lottery is won, the change process is performed. However, for the change lottery, for example, the winning probability differs depending on the game state or the like. It may be configured. Specifically, the number of stored information, the number of game times digested after the open / close execution mode (the number of digested hold information), the number of winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 after the open / close execution mode, and per unit time. V winning rate (occurrence rate of open / close execution mode), ball ejection rate per unit time (rate of number of game balls fired and number of prize balls paid out), etc. May be.

If the temporarily set open / close pattern is an open / close pattern in which V distribution can be performed even if V winning is possible on the normal route, provisional change processing is performed and after the temporary change by the temporary change processing. However, if the V prize can be won by the normal route, the second opening / closing timing change process for changing to the opening / closing pattern after the provisional change is executed. As a result, when V winning occurs, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence in the normal route, not due to V distribution. Here, if the game ball enters the accessory device 150, reaches the ball distribution unit 185 of the guidance passage 183, and then is distributed to the warp passage 250, it cannot be distributed to the warp passage 250 (that is, the normal route). The visibility of the game ball is lower than when passing through). That is, when the game ball is distributed to the warp passage 250, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the operation mode of the game ball from the front of the game machine than when the game ball is not distributed to the warp passage 250. Further, the game ball distributed to the warp passage 250 is derived so as to win a V as it is, while the game ball not distributed to the warp passage 250 is subsequently distributed by the first distribution member 300. The V prize is won after the minute and the distribution by the rotating body 201. Therefore, from the viewpoint of paying attention to the movement mode of the game ball, it is easier to enhance the effect of paying attention to the movement mode by not distributing to the warp passage 250 rather than distributing to the warp passage 250. Therefore, as described above, if either the normal route or the V distribution is possible, the opening / closing timing should be changed on the condition that the V prize can be generated on the normal route even after the change. For example, it is possible to increase the rate at which V prizes are generated on the normal route side, and it is possible to increase interest in the operation mode of the game ball.

In the above configuration, whether or not V distribution can occur after the provisional change, that is, whether or not the time when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time when V distribution can be performed overlap. The opening / closing pattern may be changed so that V winning is possible on the normal route and V distribution cannot occur. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably achieve the effect of generating the V prize on the normal route side. However, in this case, there is a concern that the processing load will increase extremely. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, if only the normal route side is the judgment target regardless of whether or not V distribution occurs after the provisional change, the normal route can be suppressed while suppressing the increase in the processing load. The effect of generating a V prize on the side can be achieved.

By performing the second opening / closing timing change process as described above, the total V winning rate can be lowered. Specifically, since the opening / closing pattern in which V winning was possible for either the normal route or V distribution can be changed to the opening / closing pattern in which V winning is possible only for the normal route, V distribution is possible. The V winning rate can be lowered by the amount of. Therefore, for example, when such a second opening / closing timing change process is performed, it is preferable to provide a privilege corresponding to the processing. Specifically, the open / close execution mode generated in the situation where the second open / close timing change process is performed is configured so that the 16R continuation mode can be easily selected, or when the second open / close timing change process is performed, the open / close execution mode is easily selected. After that, a configuration in which the probability that the first opening / closing timing change processing is performed is high (the probability of winning the change lottery process in step S2108 is high) is conceivable. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately compensate for the decrease in the V winning rate while achieving the effect of performing the second opening / closing timing changing process.

In the above embodiment, the hold information is digested as an example of the occurrence of a predetermined event in which the operation pattern of each distribution member 300, 310 is set, but the start of the round game in the open / close execution mode is a predetermined event. May occur. In this case, for example, the open / close pattern (A to C) set in each round is set as a temporarily set open / close pattern, and the possibility of V winning in the normal route in the temporarily set open / close pattern is grasped. , The provisionally set total closing pattern may be changed.

In this case, for example, in the change lottery process, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode, or the winning probability may be different depending on the number of open / close times (RC2) in one round. For example, if the number of opening and closing times in one round is set so that the winning probability is lower when the number of opening and closing times is small than when the number of opening and closing is small, V prizes are generated with a small number of opening and closing times in one round, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event such as the end of the round even though the number is not satisfied.

In addition, as a privilege to compensate for the decrease in the V winning rate due to the second opening / closing timing change processing, the subsequent change lottery process is performed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change processing is performed during one round. The configuration may be such that the probability of winning is high. That is, the more the second open / close timing change process is performed, the easier it is to perform the first open / close timing change process, and it is assumed that the V winning rate is lowered at the time of opening / closing when the second open / close timing change process is performed. However, while increasing the subsequent V winning rate and preventing the round continuation rate from becoming low (while increasing the round continuation rate), it is possible to draw attention to the operation mode of the game ball.

As described above, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second open / close timing change process is performed, the change lottery in the one round is performed according to the number of times the second open / close timing change process is performed in one round. With a configuration that increases the winning probability of processing, the probability that a V prize (round continuation) will occur when opening and closing the rear side in one round can be made higher than when opening and closing the front side. This not only suppresses the inconvenience that the number of rounds is updated because the rounds continue early in each round, but also makes the regular route V prize expected at the stage where the number of opening and closing is small in one round. It is possible to realize a novel game in which the movement mode of the game ball is enjoyed, the number of times of opening and closing increases, and V distribution is likely to occur as the end of the round is approached.

Further, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening / closing timing change processing is performed, the number of times the second opening / closing timing change processing is performed is reflected in the winning probability of the change lottery processing in the next and subsequent rounds. In terms of the configuration, the case where the V prize is won (the round is continued) on the normal route is treated more favorably after that than the case where the V prize is won (the round is continued) by the V distribution, and the operation mode of the game ball. It will be possible to get more attention. For example, the probability of winning the change lottery process may be increased in the subsequent rounds based on the number of times the second open / close timing change process has been performed, or the probability of winning the change lottery process may be increased. The opening / closing pattern A as a rate may be configured to increase the probability of being selected.

Further, not only the number of times the second open / close timing change process is performed, but also the number of times the V prize (round continuation) occurs after the second open / close timing change process is performed is reflected in the subsequent round continuation rate. May be.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the route through which the game ball that has entered the accessory device passes is grasped. Hereinafter, a configuration different from each of the above embodiments will be described.

55 and 56 show the accessory device 400 of the present embodiment. The accessory device 400 of the present embodiment basically has the same configuration as the accessory device 150 of each of the above embodiments. In FIGS. 55 and 56, the same parts as those in the above embodiments are shown by using the same reference numerals, and the description of these parts will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 55, a part different from each of the above embodiments is shown with a partial break in order to make it easier to understand.

The guidance passage 183 in the accessory device 400 is provided with a first passage detection sensor 401 capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the guidance passage 183. The first passage detection sensor 401 is a flat sensor capable of detecting a change in the magnetic field of the detection surface (upper surface), and is arranged below the rail forming the floor surface of the guide passage 183. The first passage detection sensor 401 is provided with the left passage detection sensor 402 provided in the guidance passage 183 on the side where the first distribution member 300 is provided (on the left side in front view) and the first distribution member 300. It has a right passage detection sensor 403 provided in the guidance passage 183 on the non-side (right side in front view). The left passage detection sensor 402 is provided on the downstream side (leading unit 186 side) of the left guidance passage 183 from the position where the first distribution member 300 is provided. In the following description, the region provided with the left passage detection sensor 402 in the guidance passage 183 is referred to as the left passage region 412 (left passage portion 412), and the region provided with the right passage detection sensor 403 is referred to as the right passage region 413 (right passage). Part 413).

The warp passage 250 in the accessory device 400 is provided with a second passage detection sensor 404 capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the warp passage 250. The second passage detection sensor 404 is a passage type detection sensor having an opening and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the opening. In the following description, the area where the second passage detection sensor 404 is provided in the warp passage 250 is referred to as a second passage area 414 (second passage portion 414, back passage region 414, back passage portion 414). Further, the second passage detection sensor 404 is also referred to as a back passage detection sensor 404.

The first passage detection sensors 402 and 403 and the second passage detection sensor 404 are connected to the main control device 81. In the MPU 112 of the main control device 81, it is possible to grasp that the game ball has passed by grasping the state of the detection signal from each sensor 402, 403, 404. More specifically, based on the state of the detection signal from each sensor 402, 403, 404 changing from the OFF state that does not correspond to the detection of the game ball to the corresponding ON state, the passage of the game ball at the corresponding passing portion It grasps that it has started, and it grasps that one game ball has passed based on the fact that it has been switched to the OFF state.

FIG. 57 shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, various sensor reading processing to the winning process for the operating port are executed in steps S101 to S105 in the same manner as the timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments. After that, the passage area processing is executed in step S2301, and then the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the process for the passing area, the information that the game ball has passed through the left passing area 412, the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414 and other entry portions (for example, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, V) It is a process of performing a predetermined calculation process based on the ball entry information to the winning opening 182a, etc., comparing the result of the calculation process with a set value, and outputting the result to the outside.

Here, prior to the description of the process for the passing region, the process for grasping the ball entry information to the other ball entry portions will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port in the present embodiment, and FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the accessory device 400 in the present embodiment.

In the winning process for the operating port in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the processing based on the winning of the first operating port 38 is performed in steps S201 to S205 in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. After executing the process of step S205, a process of adding 1 to the first winning number counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2401. The first winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the first operating port 38 during a predetermined period. If a negative determination is made in step S201, processing based on winning the second operating port 39 is performed in steps S207 to S211 in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. After the process of step S211 is executed, the process of adding 1 to the second winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2402. The second winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the second operating port 39 during a predetermined period. After performing the process of step S2401 or step S2402, the information acquisition process is executed in step S206, and then the winning process for the operating port ends.

In the winning process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, as in each of the above embodiments, it is determined in step S1101 whether or not a winning has occurred in the accessory device 400, and the winning has occurred. Then, in step S1102, the winning command in the winning combination is output and set. After executing the process of step S1102, the process of adding 1 to the prize winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed in step S2501. The bonus winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the winning number to the bonus device 400 during a predetermined period.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or after the process of step S2501 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1103. The processes of steps S1103 to S1106 are the same as those of the above embodiments, and are the processes based on the occurrence of the V prize. After performing the process of step S1106, in step S2502, a process of adding 1 to the V winning number counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed. The V winning number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the number of winnings to the V winning opening 182a during a predetermined period. If a negative determination is made in step S1103, or after the process of step S2502 is executed, the winning process is terminated.

In this way, the information that has won a prize in the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 is the information used for the subsequent control of the opening / closing accessory 168 (first start hold storage number RaN or second start hold storage number RbN). Separately, it is stored as a first winning number counter and a second winning number counter. In addition, the information on the occurrence of a prize in the accessory device 400 or the V winning opening 182a is information used for controlling the generation of a prize ball based on the winning in the accessory device 400 and the subsequent jackpot generation (inside the accessory). Separately from the winning command and the V winning flag), it is stored as a prize winning number counter and a V winning counter. This is due to the fact that although all the information corresponds to the entry into each ball entry portion, the use of the information is different. That is, while the reserved memory number, the winning command in the accessory, and the V winning flag are used for the game progress, each counter passes through the left passing area 412, the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414. It is used for arithmetic processing of the information passed by.

Next, the process for the passing region in step S2301 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the process for passing areas, detection processing of each passing area is performed in steps S2601 to S2603, processing for counting for a predetermined period is performed in steps S2604 to S2608, arithmetic processing is performed in step S2609, and arithmetic processing is performed in step S2610. The comparison process is performed, and the output process is performed in step S2611. Each will be described in detail below.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the detection process of the left passing region performed in step S2601.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the left ball jam flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The left ball jam flag is a flag stored when the MPU 112 grasps that a ball jam has occurred in the left passage region 412, and more specifically, the game ball is detected by the left passage detection sensor 402. It is a flag stored based on the fact that the state of being present continues for the first period (26 msec in this embodiment). If the left ball jam flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2702, and it is determined whether or not the left pass flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The left passage flag is a flag stored based on the fact that the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the passage of the game ball, and more specifically, the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the game ball. It is a flag stored based on the fact that the state has continued for the second period (8 msec in this embodiment).

If the left pass flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2703, and it is determined whether or not the left detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The left detection in progress flag is a flag stored based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the left passage detection sensor 402. The case where the left-passing detection flag is not stored means that the game ball has not been detected by the left-passage detection sensor 402 in the previous process. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2704 and the left-passage detection sensor 402 is performed. Whether or not is detecting the game ball (in the ON state) is grasped based on the state of the detection signal from the left detection sensor 402. When the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the game ball, the process of storing the left detection flag is executed in step S2705, and then the present detection process ends. If the left passage detection sensor 402 does not detect in step S2704, the present detection process ends as it is.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the left detection flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the left passage detection sensor 402 has detected the game ball also in this process. When the left passage detection sensor 402 detects the game ball, the process of adding 1 to the left detection counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed in step S2707. The left detection in progress counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the period during which the left passage detection sensor 402 continues to detect the game ball. After performing the addition processing in step S2707, whether or not the left detection in progress counter becomes "3" in step S2708 based on the processing result of step S2707, that is, the game is played by the left passage detection sensor 402. It is determined whether or not the state of detecting the sphere has continued for 4 processing times (8 msec).

If it is determined in step S2708 that the left detection in progress counter is "3", the process of storing the left passage flag is executed in step S2709. When it is determined in step S2706 that the left passage detection sensor 402 is not detecting the game ball, or after the left passage flag is stored in step S2709, the left detection flag is deleted in step S2710. After that, this detection process is terminated. If it is determined in step S2708 that the counter during left detection is less than "3", the present detection process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S2702 that the left passage flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2711. In step S2711, it is determined whether or not the left passage detection sensor 402 has detected the game ball. If the left passage detection sensor 402 does not detect the game ball, that is, if the game ball is detected for 4 processing times, but the game ball is not detected in this processing, the left passage area 412 Assuming that the game ball has passed, in step S2712, a process of adding 1 to the left pass number counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The left passing number counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp the passing number of the left passing area 412 during a predetermined period. Then, in step S2713, a process of erasing the left passage flag is performed, and in step S2714, a process of resetting the left detection in progress counter to 0 is performed, and then this detection process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the game ball is still detected by the left passage detection sensor 402 in step S2711, the process proceeds to step S2715. In step S2715, a process of adding 1 to the counter during left detection is executed. Then, in step S2716, whether or not the left detection counter is set to "12", that is, the state in which the game ball is detected by the left passage detection sensor 402 continues for 13 processing times (26 msec). Determine if it has been done. If the left detection in progress counter is less than "12", the present detection process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the counter during left detection is "12", there is a high possibility that the game ball is staying in the left passing area 412 (ball jamming has occurred). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2717, the left passage flag is cleared, and the left detection counter is reset to 0 in step S2718. Then, in step S2719, the process of storing the left ball jam flag is executed, and then the present detection process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the left ball jam flag is stored, in step S2720, it is determined whether or not the left passage detection sensor 402 still detects the game ball. If it is detected, this detection process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the game ball is not detected, it is highly possible that the ball jam in the left passing region 412 has been cleared. In this case, the left ball jam flag is cleared in step S2721. Therefore, this detection process is terminated.

The detection process of the right-passing area in step S2602 and the detection process of the back-passing area in step S2603 are as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, and are substantially the same as the detection process of the left-passing area. The difference is that various flags (left detection flag, left pass flag, left ball jam flag) and various counters (left detection counter, left pass count counter) correspond to each passing area (right detection in progress). Flags, right pass flag, right ball jam flag, right detection counter, right pass count counter, back detection flag, back pass flag, back ball jam flag, back detection counter, back pass count counter) are used. It is a standard when it is judged that a ball jam has occurred. Each criterion for determining that a ball jam has occurred is that the game ball is continuously detected for 26 msec in the detection process of the left passing area, and the game ball is detected for 20 msec in the detection process of the right passing area. It is assumed that the detection is continued (step S2816), and that the game ball is continuously detected for 14 msec in the detection process of the back passage area (step S2916).

That is, as a criterion for determining that the ball is jammed, the left passing area 412 is longer (loose) than the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414 is longer than the left and right passing areas 421 and 413. Is set to. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the left passage region 412, the first distribution member 300 exists on the upstream side thereof, and for example, when the first distribution member 300 passes over the first distribution member 300 at the switching operation timing of the first distribution member 300. The passing speed of the game ball passing through the left passing area 412 can change. Then, for example, when passing through the left passing region 412 in a state where the passing speed is lowered by the first distribution member 300, the passing speed is slower than when passing through the right passing region 413. Therefore, as described above, the criteria for determining ball jam is not determined when the speed of the left passage region 412 is longer than that of the right passage region 413 and the speed is reduced by the first distribution member 300. I am doing it.

Further, the back passage region 414 has a steeper vertical inclination than the left and right passage regions 421 and 413 (see FIG. 55), and the speed of passing through the back passage region 414 is higher than the left and right passage regions 421 and 413. It tends to be faster than the speed of passing through. Further, the back passage region 414 is a region that is difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine, and is a region with low visibility even when compared with the left and right passage regions 421 and 413. Therefore, it can be said that it is more difficult for the player or the manager of the game hall to notice when the ball is jammed in the back passage area 414 than when the ball is jammed in the left and right passing areas 421 and 413. Then, comparing the probability that the game ball that has passed through the back passage region 414 is led out to the V winning opening 182a and the probability that the game ball that has passed through the left and right passing regions 421 and 413 is led out to the V winning opening 182a, Since the left and right passing regions 421 and 413 pass through the rotating body 201, they are more likely to be led out to the V winning opening 182a when they pass through the back passing region 414. That is, the back passage area 414 not only tends to have a faster passing speed than the left and right passing areas 421 and 413, but also makes it difficult to notice the ball jam, and the loss suffered by the player when the ball jam occurs. Can grow. Therefore, by setting the criterion for determining ball jam in the back passage region 414 to be shorter (stricter) than the criterion in the left and right passage regions 421 and 413, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of ball jam more quickly. Become.

In the process for passing areas (FIG. 60), after performing the detection processing of each passing area in steps S2601 to S2603, the firing state grasping process is executed in step S2604. In the firing state grasping process, the player's hand is touching the firing handle 60 (the touch sensor provided on the firing handle 60 is in the ON state), and the firing handle 60 is directed from the initial position to the maximum operating position. It is understood that the game ball is being fired when all the firing conditions are satisfied, that the predetermined amount is operated and that the stop switch (launch stop switch) provided on the firing handle 60 is not operated. However, if any of the firing conditions is not met, it is determined that the game ball has not been fired. Then, in step S2605, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being fired based on the processing result of step S2604.

If it is determined that the game ball is being fired, the process proceeds to step S2606, and a process of adding 1 to the number of shot counters provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed for each shot cycle. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 launches a game ball with a firing cycle of 0.6 sec when a firing operation is being performed. Therefore, in step S2606, various flags and counters are used to add 1 to the number of shots counter 1 once every 300 timer interrupt processes (2 msec × 300 = 0.6 sec).

If it is determined that the game ball has not been fired, the process proceeds to step S2607, and it is determined whether or not the stop period during which the game ball has not been fired has become a predetermined time (three times) or more of the firing cycle. In such processing, for example, various flags and counters are used to determine whether or not the state in which the game ball has not been fired has continued for 900 timer interrupt processing times (2 msec × 900 = 1.8 sec). When the stop period becomes a predetermined time or more of the firing cycle, a process of resetting each passing number counter and each winning number counter to 0 is performed in step S2608.

After performing the processing of step S2606 or step S2608, or when it is determined in step S2607 that the stop period is less than a predetermined time of the firing cycle, the process proceeds to step S2609. Then, in steps S2609 to S2611, after performing arithmetic processing, comparison processing, and output processing, respectively, the processing for the passing area is terminated.

First, the arithmetic processing in step S2609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3001, a process of grasping the value of each passing number counter is executed. Then, in step S3002, it is determined whether or not all the passing number counters are 0. If any of the passing number counters is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, a process of grasping the number of shots is executed with reference to the value of the number of shots counter. In the following step S3004, a process of grasping the value of each winning number counter is executed. In the subsequent step S3005, a process of calculating the passing rate of each passing area 412 to 414 with respect to the number of shots is performed. In such processing, the passing rate of each passing area per unit firing number is calculated by dividing the value of each passing number counter grasped in step S3001 by the value of the firing number counter grasped in step S3003. Can be done. The passing rate of each passing area per unit firing number is an index showing how many shots passed through each passing area. Then, a process of storing the calculated passing rate in the RAM 114 is performed.

In the subsequent step S3006, a process of calculating the passing rate of each passing area 412 to 414 with respect to the number of winnings to the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, and the accessory device 400 is performed. In such a process, the value of each passing number counter grasped in step S3001 is divided by the value of each winning number counter grasped in step S3004, so that the unit can be entered into each of the ball entry units 38, 39, 400. The passing rate of each passing area per number can be calculated. The passing rate of each passing area per unit number of balls is an index indicating how many times the ball has passed through each passing area at a rate of once for each winning. Then, a process of storing the calculated passing rate in the RAM 114 is performed.

In the following step S3007, a process of calculating the V winning rate for the number of passing pieces of each passing area 412 to 414 is performed. In such processing, the value of the V winning number counter of the V winning opening 182a grasped in step S3004 is divided by the value of each passing number counter grasped in step S3001, so that the unit passes to the passing regions 412 to 414. The V winning rate per number can be calculated. The V winning rate per unit passing number is an index indicating how many passing times the V winning rate occurs in the passing areas 412 to 414. Then, a process of storing the calculated V winning rate in the RAM 114 is performed. After that, the arithmetic processing is terminated.

When all the passing number counters are 0 in step S3002, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the V winning number counter is 0. If it is 0, the arithmetic processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the V winning number counter is not 0 in step S3008, that is, if V winning occurs even though all the passing number counters are 0, the RAM 114 in step S3009. By storing the V error flag in the various flag storage areas 114e, the V error state is set. The V error state is a situation in which a V prize is generated even though the game ball has not passed through each of the passing areas 412 to 414 in the accessory device 400. By being set to the V error state, the external output is performed in the output process (FIG. 67) of step S2611, and the game stop process is performed. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, the comparison process in step S2610 will be described while calculating the flowchart of FIG. 65. The comparison process is a process of comparing the set value set in the pachinko machine 10 in advance with each numerical value calculated by the above calculation process.

As the set values, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 66, the passing rate of each passing area for the number of shots, the passing rate for each winning number, and the V winning rate for the unit passing of the passing area are set. For example, as the passing rate for the number of shots, the passing rate of the left passing area 412 is set to "0.005" as a set value, and the passing rate of the left passing area 412 is set once every 200 ball launches. Is set as an index to judge that is "normal". Further, the passing rate of the right passing area 413 is set to "0.01" as a set value, and it is judged that it is "normal" to pass through the right passing area 413 at a rate of once for every 100 ball launches. It is set as an index to pass through, and the right passing area 413 is set to be easier to pass than the left passing area 412. As already described, this difference in ease of passage is due to the presence or absence of the first distribution member 300. "0.0001" is set as the set value for the passing rate of the back passing area 414, and it is an index for judging that it is "normal" to pass through the back passing area 414 at a rate of once for every 1000 ball launches. Is set as.

As for the passing rate for winning the first operating port 38, the left passing area 412 passes once every eight winnings to the first operating port 38, and the right passing area 413 passes once every four times. The set values are set so that passing through the back passage region 414 at a rate of once in 40 times is an index to be judged as "normal". Further, the passing rate for winning the prize in the second operating port 39 is set to be twice the passing rate for the winning in the first operating port 38, which is the opening / closing accessory 168 based on the winning in the second operating port 39. The number of times of opening and closing is two, which corresponds to twice the number of times of opening and closing based on the winning of the first operating port 38.

As for the passing rate for winning a prize in the accessory device 400, it passes through the left passing area 412 once every four times, passes through the right passing area 413 once every two times, and once every 20 times. The set values are set so that passing through the back passage area 414 at the ratio of the above is an index to be judged as "normal".

As for the V winning rate per unit passage of each passing area 412 to 414, one V winning occurs when passing through the left and right passing areas 421 and 413 six times, and one when passing through the back passing area 414 once. The set values are set so that the occurrence of V winning is an index to be judged as "normal". The fact that there is no difference in the V winning rates of the left and right passing regions 421 and 413 means that the first distribution member 300 is arranged on the upstream side of the left passing region 412, that is, the distribution is performed by the first distribution member 300. The rate is due to the fact that it has no effect after passing through the left passage area 412.

Here, the set value may be a value set in advance in the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. 66, or may be set by the manager of the game hall. When it is set by the manager of the game hall, for example, an operation switch for setting a set value is provided on the back surface of the main control device 81. Then, the set value can be set by operating the operation switch. By providing the operation switch at a position where it can be operated by opening the inner frame 13, it is possible to restrict access to the operation switch by anyone other than the manager of the game hall. As the set value, for example, it is preferable to provide a set value table in which a plurality of set values are stored in the ROM 113, and to read the set value table so that the details of the set rate of each passing rate and the V winning rate can be grasped. Further, in the configuration set by the operation switch, it is preferable that a plurality of setting value tables are provided and the setting value table to be referred to can be changed by operating the operation switch.

By the way, in the comparison process (FIG. 65), first, in step S3101, the set value reading process is executed. In the following step S3102, a process of comparing the passing rate with respect to the number of shots calculated in step S3005 and the set value is executed. In the subsequent step S3103, it is determined whether or not the current passing rate is within the range of + 10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison process in step S3102. For example, in the case of the passing rate with respect to the number of shots of the left passing area 412 in FIG. 66, the value calculated in step S3005 is -10% (0. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 0045). If it is not within the range, in step S3104, the firing number error flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 to set the firing number error state. If it is determined in step S3103 that it is within the range, it is determined that it is normal, and the firing number error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103, or after the process of step S3104 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, a process of comparing the passing rate and the set value for each winning number calculated in step S3006 is executed. In the subsequent step S3106, it is determined whether or not the current passing rate is within the range of + 10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison process in step S3105. For example, in the case of the passing rate for winning the first operating port 38 of the left passing region 412 in FIG. 66, the value calculated in step S3006 is from + 10% (0.1375) of the set value “0.125”. It is determined whether or not it is within the range of -10% (0.1125). If it is not within the range, in step S3107, the winning number error flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 to set the winning number error state. If it is determined in step S3106 that it is within the range, it is determined that it is normal, and the winning number error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3106, or after the process of step S3107 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3108. In step S3108, a process of comparing the V winning rate and the set value for each passing number calculated in step S3007 is executed. In the following step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current V winning rate is within the range of + 10% to -10% of the set value based on the result of the comparison process in step S3108. For example, in the case of the V winning rate for passing through the left passing region 412 in FIG. 66, the value calculated in step S3007 is -10% (0.) from + 10% (0.143) of the set value "0.13". It is determined whether or not it is within the range of 117). If it is not within the range, the V winning rate error flag is set in the V winning rate error state by storing the V winning rate error flag in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S3110. If it is determined in step S3109 that it is within the range, it is determined that it is normal, and the V winning rate error state is not set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3109, or after the process of step S3110 is executed, the comparison process ends.

Next, the output process of step S2611 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. In the present embodiment, the result of the arithmetic processing and the comparison processing performed by the main control device 81 is output to the hall computer of the game hall via the external output terminal 99 connected to the main control device 81. Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the external output terminal 99 from the main control device 81 to the hall computer of the game hall, a terminal indicating whether or not it is in a V error state and a firing number error state. A terminal indicating whether or not it is, a terminal indicating whether or not it is in a winning number error state, a terminal indicating whether or not it is in a V winning rate error state, and a terminal indicating whether or not it is in a ball jam state are provided.

In the output process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the V error state is present. As described above, the V error state is a state in which a V prize is generated even though the game ball has not passed through each of the passing areas 412 to 414 in the accessory device 400. In this case, in step S3202, the output signal for the terminal indicating the V error state is set to the HI state. The output signal is set to be switchable between the HI state and the LOW state, so that the HI state indicates that the V error state is set, and the LOW state indicates that the V error state is not set. It is set. The relationship between the HI state and the LOW state is the same for each output signal described below. Further, in these output signals, the relationship between the HI state and the LOW state may be reversed.

By setting the terminal indicating the V error state in step S3202 to the HI state, it is possible to identify that the V error state has occurred in the hall computer of the game hall. After executing the process of step S3202, the game stop process is executed in step S3203. In the game stop process, processing such as stopping the launch of the game ball and stopping the payout of the game ball is performed, and the progress of the game is stopped. After executing the process of step S3202, the output process ends. When the game stop process is executed, for example, in the open / close execution mode, the RAM 114 may store the game state (number of rounds, number of winnings, number of open / closed, etc.) at that timing. By doing so, when the game is restarted, it is possible to continue the game from the stopped state. In this case, it is preferable that the manager of the game hall can select whether to continue the game from the stopped state or restart the game from the normal game state (from the initialized state). For example, by operating the RAM clear switch provided in the main control device 81 to turn on / off the power, the gaming state can be initialized and restarted, while the power can be turned on without simply operating the RAM clear switch. When / OFF, it is preferable to have a configuration that can continue from the stopped state.

If the V error state is not set in step S3202, the output signal for the terminal indicating the V error state is set to the LOW state in step S3204. If the output signal is in the LOW state before the processing in step S3204, that state is maintained. This also applies to the processing related to the setting of the state of each of the other output signals.

After executing the process of step S3204, the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, it is determined whether or not the V winning number counter is "3" as a predetermined number. The predetermined number is a number that triggers an external output, and in the present embodiment, the external output is performed every time three game balls enter the V winning opening 182a. It should be noted that this number is arbitrary and may be less than 3 or more than 3. However, considering the frequency of winning the V winning opening 182a, if the number is too large, it is possible that the output trigger will not occur easily. Therefore, for example, the number of winnings that can occur in a predetermined time (1 hour) or less is set. Is preferable. The output timing may be determined by the internal timer counter of the MPU 112, a predetermined clock circuit, or the like. If the number is less than three in step S3205, the main output process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number is 3, the process of clearing the V winning number counter is performed in step S3206. This makes it possible to prepare for the next opportunity for external output.

In the following step S3207, it is determined whether or not the number of shots is in the error state. If the number of shots is in the error state, the output signal for the terminal indicating that the number of shots is in the error state is set in the HI state in step S3208, and if the number of shots is not in the error state, the same terminal is set in step S3209. Set the output signal to the LOW state. By setting the terminal indicating the firing number error state in step S3208 to the HI state, it is possible to identify that the firing number error state has occurred in the hall computer of the game hall.

After executing the process of step S3208 or step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not there is a winning number error state. If there is a winning number error state, the output signal for the terminal indicating the winning number error state is set to the HI state in step S3211, and if it is not in the winning number error state, the output signal for the same terminal is set in step S3212. Is set to the LOW state. By setting the terminal indicating that the winning number error state is in the HI state in step S3211, it is possible to identify that the winning number error state has occurred in the hall computer of the game hall.

After executing the process of step S3211 or step S3212, it is determined in step S3213 whether or not the V winning rate error state is present. If the V winning rate error state is set, the output signal for the terminal indicating the V winning rate error state is set to the HI state in step S3214, and if it is not the V winning rate error state, the same terminal is set in step S3215. The output signal for is set to the LOW state. By setting the terminal indicating that the V winning rate error state is in the HI state in step S3214, it is possible to specify that the V winning rate error state has occurred in the hall computer of the game hall.

After executing the process of step S3214 or step S3215, it is determined in step S3216 whether or not the ball jam flag is stored. When the ball jam flag is stored and the ball is jammed, the output signal for the terminal indicating the ball jam state is set to the HI state in step S3217, and when the ball is not jammed, the ball jam state is set to step S3218. The output signal for the same terminal is set to the LOW state. After executing the process of step S3217 or step S3218, this output process is terminated. By setting the terminal indicating that the ball is in the jammed state in step S3217 to the HI state, the hall computer of the game hall can identify that the ball is jammed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In the accessory device 400, each passing area 412 to 414 is distributed from the ball distribution unit 185 to each passing area 412 to 414 by the first distribution member 300 or the second distribution member 310 to generate a V prize. It is configured so that the passage information of can be grasped. This makes it possible to grasp information such as what route was followed to generate the V prize, information on the route that easily leads to the V prize, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to identify that a fraudulent act using the route leading to the V winning is performed and the occurrence of an abnormality in the route leading to the V winning. Therefore, it can be useful for improving the accuracy of fraud / abnormality detection.

In this case, an error state occurs in which the calculation process is executed using the number of passes in each of the pass areas 412 to 414, the result of the calculation process is compared with the set value, and the number of passes is abnormally biased. The configuration is such that the information on whether or not the game is played is output externally and notified to the manager of the game hall. Here, in a general gaming machine, based on the occurrence of a ball entering each entry portion such as the V winning opening 182a, the entry information is output externally. This is set so that when a ball enters each entry section, including the V winning opening 182a, a privilege such as a prize ball is given to the player, and the prize ball is given. This is to grasp what has been done in the game hall. Then, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud or abnormality, a sensor (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, or the like) for detecting the fraud or abnormality is provided for the ball entry portion to which such a prize ball is given. However, as described above, fraud and abnormality can occur not only in the entry portion to which the prize ball is given but also in the route leading to the entry portion. Therefore, as described above, each route 412 to 414 It is thought that the accuracy of finding fraud and anomalies will be greatly improved by using the passage information.

However, when it is difficult to identify when fraud or abnormality occurs in the route to the ball entry section, compared to the case where fraudulent activity or abnormality occurs directly in the ball entry section. There are many. This is not an attempt to directly generate a winning / fail lottery or a prize ball as a fraudulent act performed on the route leading to the entry section, but a passage route so that entry into the entry section is likely to occur. In addition, the abnormality that occurs in the path leading to the ball entry part is also an abnormality that causes the passage rate to be far from the design passage rate, and these events are biases that occur accidentally. This is due to the fact that it is difficult to judge the difference from. Then, in order to clearly judge the difference from such an accidental bias, it becomes necessary to set a finer judgment standard, which not only causes a problem that the processing load rises, but also depends on the finer judgment standard. If an erroneous judgment is made, it may eventually lead to unnecessary confirmation work by the manager of the game hall or the like.

Therefore, instead of making such a judgment on the gaming machine side, the gaming machine side uses the judgment material (information on the occurrence of an event that can be regarded as fraudulent or abnormal, bias information, information on various errors). By adopting a configuration for grasping and outputting and entrusting the final judgment to the manager of the game hall, etc., it is possible to suitably detect the occurrence of fraud / abnormality from the viewpoint of workability.

In addition, in the configuration that outputs information on various errors to the computer in the game hall, if a V error state occurs, the information is output immediately, and other error states (fire number error state, winning number error). When a state, a V winning rate error state, or a ball jam state) has occurred, the information is output after waiting until the V winning number counter reaches 3. The V error state is a case where a V prize is generated even though the passage area 412 to 414 has not been passed, and it can be said that an obvious fraud or abnormality has occurred. Therefore, when such a state occurs, it is possible to promptly take measures against fraud or abnormality by immediately notifying the manager of the game hall or the like.

On the other hand, in other error states (especially the number of shots error state, the number of winning numbers error state, and the V winning rate error state), the relationship between the number of passing numbers in the passing areas 412 to 414 and other information deviates from the design value. It can be said that this is a situation that can occur due to accidental bias. Even in such a state, if the configuration is such that the manager of the game hall is immediately notified, the confirmation work of the manager of the game hall or the like may be complicated. However, as a game hall, there are circumstances in which it is desirable to grasp such situations, and from the viewpoint of balancing them, wait for a predetermined period (the period until the V winning number counter reaches 3) before outputting. It was configured to be. This makes it possible to maintain a balance between the workability of the game hall manager and the like and the frequency of confirmation of fraudulent activities and abnormal occurrences.

Further, as other error states, not only the output of the firing number error state, the winning number error state and the V winning rate error state, but also the output of the ball jam state is performed after waiting for a predetermined period. It can be said that the occurrence of the ball jam state is not a viewpoint that a deviation from the design value occurs as in other error states, but an event in which there is a high possibility that an obvious abnormality has occurred. On the other hand, the occurrence of a ball jam condition is a matter that can be visually confirmed. Therefore, in a situation where the player may suffer a disadvantage due to the occurrence of a ball jam (for example, a situation in which the ball is jammed in the back passage area 414, which is a route that is easy to win a V), the player himself immediately plays the game. It is thought to call the manager of the hall. In addition, there may be a situation in which the game hole side may suffer a disadvantage depending on the location of the ball jam (for example, a situation in which the ball jam occurs in the left and right passing areas 421 and 413 which are routes where it is difficult to win a V). As shown in the above, the route where it is difficult to win a V is located on the front side of the gaming machine rather than the route where it is easy to win a V, and it can be said that it is a place where it is easy to visually confirm. Therefore, when a situation occurs in which the game hall side may suffer a disadvantage due to ball jamming, the manager of the game hall or the like is more likely to notice than in a situation in which the player side may suffer a disadvantage. It can be said that. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the output is performed after waiting for a predetermined period as in the above configuration, the frequency of execution of the output processing (steps S3216 to S3218) is reduced, and the processing load is reduced. Is possible.

The output frequency of the ball jam state may be different from the output frequency of the firing number error state, the winning number error state, and the V winning rate error state. In this case, the output frequency of the ball jam state may be higher than the output frequency of the other firing number error state, the winning number error state, and the V winning rate error state. More specifically, it may be configured to output immediately when a ball jam state occurs, such as output of a V error state, or, for example, output at a timing when the V winning number counter is 2 or 1 which is less than 3. It may be configured. By doing so, it is possible to promptly notify the manager of the game hall or the like without visually noticing it.

Further, the output frequency may be different depending on the route in which the ball is clogged. Specifically, the output frequency related to the occurrence of ball clogging in the left and right passing areas 421 and 413 is set to be higher than the output frequency in the back passing area 414, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the route where the player side may suffer a disadvantage. May be configured to leave it to the player's own actions and output the occurrence of ball jam on the route where the game hall side may suffer a disadvantage more quickly. From the viewpoint of player protection, contrary to the above, the configuration may be configured to output the occurrence of ball clogging on a route where the player may suffer a disadvantage more quickly.

Further, the output frequency may be different depending on the route that triggered each error state. Specifically, the output frequency may be different depending on whether the error state (fire number error state, winning number error state, V winning rate error state) is set based on the passing information of any of the passing areas 412 to 414. .. As described above, considering that the back passage area 414 is most likely to lead to V winning and the left passing area 412 is most difficult to lead to V winning, the error in the back passing area 414 is most closely related to the V winning and passes to the left. It is considered that the error in the area 412 is the weakest related to the V prize. Therefore, the output frequency may be set according to the relationship with the V prize, such as increasing the output frequency as the relevance is stronger.

Further, the output frequency may be different depending on which error state (firing number error state, winning number error state, V winning rate error state). The V winning rate error state is more closely related to the V winning than the firing number error state and the winning number error state, and it is considered that it is highly significant to increase the output frequency of this V winning rate error state.

The passing areas 412 to 414 were set as one route on the upstream side of the V winning opening 182a, which triggers the occurrence of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to grasp information as to whether the game ball that has passed through any of the passing regions 412 to 414 easily flows into the V winning opening 182a, that is, whether it is likely to lead to a big hit.

Due to the presence of the second distribution member 310 on the upstream side of the passage regions 412 to 414, the difference between the design value (set value) of the distribution rate by the second distribution member 310 and the actual distribution rate. Therefore, it is possible to grasp information such as whether or not an act of intentionally guiding to any of the passing areas 412 to 414 (particularly the back passing area 414) is performed. Further, since the passing rate is calculated by using the information on the number of winnings in the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the accessory based on the winning in the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39. It is possible to grasp information such as whether or not an act of intentionally increasing the winning rate is performed by the difference between the design value of the winning rate of the device 150 and the actual winning rate.

<13th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the error state information is output to the staging control device 82 as an external output from the main control device 81, and the staging control device 82 notifies the staging control device 82 about the error state. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an output process in the present embodiment.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the processing results of the arithmetic processing and the comparison processing to the effect control device 82 side. In the present embodiment, the output timing of step S3301 is set to occur once an hour, and the output timing can be grasped by the internal timer counter of the MPU 112. The details of this output timing will be described later.

In the following step S3302, a process of grasping each passing number counter is executed. In the following step S3303, a process of grasping the number of shots is executed. In the following step S3304, a process of grasping each winning number counter is executed. That is, in steps S3302 to S3304, the data before the arithmetic processing is grasped. The data may be temporarily stored in the RAM 114 or the like based on the processes of step S3001, step S3003, and step S3004, and may be read out in steps S3302 to S3304.

In the following step S3305, a process of grasping the passing rate with respect to the number of shots is executed. Further, in step S3306, a process of grasping the passing rate for each winning number is executed. Then, in step S3307, a process of grasping the V winning rate for each passing number is executed. It can be said that the processes of steps S3305 to S3307 are processes for reading the calculation results (calculation results) of the calculation process. It should be noted that the calculation result of the calculation process may be temporarily stored in the RAM 114 and read out in steps S3305 to S3307.

In the following step S3308, a process of reading the set value is executed. In the following step S3309, as a result of comparison between the passing rate with respect to the number of shots and the set value, a process of grasping the presence / absence of the number of shots error flag is executed. In the following step S3310, a process of grasping the presence / absence of the winning number error flag is executed as a comparison result of the passing rate and the set value for each winning number. In the following step S3311, a process of grasping the presence / absence of the V winning rate error flag is executed as a comparison result between the V winning rate and the set value for each passing number. That is, it can be said that steps S3308 to S3311 are processes for grasping the processing results of the comparison processing (FIG. 65).

In the following step S3312, a process of grasping the presence / absence of each ball jam flag is executed. Then, in step S3313, a process of setting each information grasped in steps S3302 to S3312 as an error command is executed. The error command set in step S3313 is output to the effect control device 82 in the following step S3314. After the processing of step S3214 is performed, the output processing is terminated.

Next, the error processing when the above error command is received on the effect control device 82 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. The error processing is a processing started by the MPU 142 of the staging control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle).

First, in step SB301, it is determined whether or not an error command from the main control unit 81 has been received. If an error command has been received, in step SB302, it is determined whether or not the received error command includes ball jam information. If the information on the ball jam is not included, it is determined in step SB303 whether or not the information on the number of shots error state is included. If the information on the number of shots error status is not included, it is determined in step SB304 whether or not the information on the number of winnings error status is included. If the information on the number of winnings error status is not included, it is determined in step SB305 whether or not the information on the V winning rate error status is included. If it is determined in step SB301 that the error command has not been received, the error processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of step SB302 to step SB305, processing related to the error state after step SB306 is performed. That is, in step SB306, a process of setting an error state is performed. In the error state setting process, a process of storing an error flag indicating an error state is performed in various flag storage areas of the RAM 144. By storing the error flag on the effect control device 82 side, the effect control device 82 side also enters an error state in which it is known that various ball jams and various error states have occurred on the main control device 81 side. By setting and clearing the error flag, the setting of the error state is canceled. By setting the error state on the effect control device 82 side, the effect control device 82 performs special notification for notifying the error state.

In the following step SB307, the raw data included in the error command received this time (information grasped by the processing of steps S3302 to S3308 and set by the error command in step S3312) is grasped, and the main control device 81 side. The effect control device 82 also performs a collation process for the occurrence of various ball jams and various error states grasped in. Since such processing is the same as the processing of the arithmetic processing (FIG. 64) and the comparison processing (FIG. 65) on the main control device 81 side, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SB308, it is determined whether or not the collation result on the staging control device 82 side is also the result of the error state in which various ball jams and various error states have occurred. The case of affirmative determination in step SB308 means that the processing result calculated / compared by the main control device 81 and the processing result calculated / compared by the staging control device 82 side are the same result. In this case, the error state set in step SB306 is maintained as it is, and the error processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the case where the negative determination is made in step SB308 means that the processing result calculated / compared by the main control device 81 and the processing result calculated / compared by the staging control device 82 are different results. .. In this case, in step SB309, the process for canceling the error state set in step SB306 is executed, and then the error processing is terminated. Specifically, in step SB309, a process of clearing the error flag is performed. Further, even if the V winning rate error status information is not included in step SB305 and the error command received this time does not include various ball jam information or various error status information, step SB309 may be performed. To clear the error flag. In such a process, if the error flag is not stored, the state is maintained.

That is, the error state is provisionally set based on the error command from the main control device 81, collated based on the raw data included in the error command, and officially set. As described above, by setting the double check on the main control device 81 side and the staging control device 82 side, it is possible to avoid erroneous setting of the error state based on the program error or the like.

Here, when the notification regarding the ball jam or the error of the passing rate calculated based on the passing result of the passing area is given, it is considered that the manager of the game hall or the like visually checks again. Then, compared to the case where obvious fraudulent acts such as magnets and vibrations are performed, or when an event that makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, from the viewpoint of the accuracy of the notification rather than the speed of the notification. It is thought that weight should be placed. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress false alarms and reduce the work load of the administrator and the like.

Further, the error state is canceled based on the fact that an error command that does not include information on the occurrence of ball jam or the like is received from the main control device 81. As a result, it is possible to avoid an increase in the work load of the administrator or the like due to the continuation of the error state even though the error state has been restored.

An example of the special notification when the error state is set on the effect control device 82 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. In this example, as a special notification, the execution mode of a predetermined notification performed in a situation not set in the error state is set to be different by being set in the error state. As a predetermined notification, here, an RTC effect (real-time clock effect) performed based on the time corresponding to the predetermined effect timing in the gaming machine will be described as an example. For example, when multiple same models are installed side by side in a game hall where game machines are installed, if RTC effects are generated at the same timing in these multiple game machines arranged side by side, each game machine works as if they were interlocked. It can be a dynamic production as if you were doing it.

First, the RTC effect processing for performing this RTC effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70 (a). The RTC staging process is a process started by the staging control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In step SB401, the RTC counter is updated. The RTC counter is a time counter provided in the RAM 144. By replacing or adding the RTC counter to the configuration of the staging control device 82 and providing a predetermined clock circuit for time, and connecting the clock circuit and the staging control device 82, the time is set on the staging control device 82 side. It may be possible to grasp.

In step SB402, a process of grasping the value of the RTC counter updated in step SB401 is performed. Then, in step SB403, it is determined whether or not it is the timing (set time) for performing the RTC effect based on the information of the RTC counter. When it is the timing to perform the RTC effect, the process for executing the RTC effect is performed in step SB404, and when it is the timing when the RTC effect is not performed, the process for the RTC effect is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), the timing of performing the RTC effect is set to occur once an hour during the opening of the game hall in the present embodiment. More specifically, the RTC effect occurs at 10:00, 11:00, 12:00 ,,,, and 22:00. On the other hand, the setting time for the error command output for affirmative determination in step S3301 is set 5 minutes before the RTC effect occurs. More specifically, the output timing of the error command is set to occur at 9:55, 10:55, 11:55 ,,,, 21:55.

Next, as the process for special notification when the error state is set, the error notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. The error notification process is a process started by the effect control device 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In step SB501, it is determined by checking the error flag whether or not the error state is set. When the error state is set, it is determined in step SB502 whether or not the delay flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 144. The delay flag is a flag stored in step SB504 by performing the delay processing of step SB503 described later. If the delay flag is not stored, the RTC effect delay processing is performed in step SB503. The delay process of the RTC effect is a process for delaying the measurement by the RTC counter by a predetermined time (for example, 3 min), and a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the predetermined time from the RTC counter is performed. As a result, the RTC effect of the gaming machine set in the error state is delayed by a predetermined time as compared with the RTC effect of other gaming machines (game machines not set in the error state). Become. Then, in step SB504, the process of storing the delay flag in the RAM 144 is performed.

Whether or not the error state is set in step SB501, the delay flag is stored in step SB502, or whether or not the error state is restored in step SB505 after the processing of step SB504 is executed. judge. In this determination, when the process of clearing the stored error flag is performed in the process of canceling the error state in step SB309, the affirmative judgment is made only once as if the error state has been restored. For example, when the error flag is deleted in step SB309, a flag indicating the deletion is stored, and this flag is confirmed in step SB505. If the flag is stored, the affirmative determination is made in step SB505, and the flag is deleted. If the flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step SB505. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB505, the RTC effect recovery process is executed in step SB506. In such a process, a process for restoring the RTC counter delayed by the delay process in step SB503 is performed. Specifically, the RTC counter is subjected to a process of adding a value corresponding to a predetermined time. As a result, the RTC effect is performed at the original timing set. Then, after clearing the delay flag in step SB507, the error notification process ends. If a negative determination is made in step SB505, the error notification process is terminated as it is.

A state in which the special notification using the RTC effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 72.

If the error state is not set, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the RTC effect is performed, the RTC effect is performed at the same timing for other same models installed in the game hall. As a result, it is possible to create an integrated effect by performing the same effect on the entire island facility where the same model is installed, resulting in a more dynamic effect.

When the error state is set, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), the RTC effect does not occur in the gaming machine set in the error state even when the RTC effect is performed. In other words, the RTC effect is performed on the gaming machines other than the gaming machines set in the error state. As a result, the manager or the like of the game hall can grasp that the game machine is in an error state because the RTC effect is not performed.

Here, as a configuration for notifying the error state in the gaming machine, a warning display by the error display unit or a notification by a warning sound from the speaker unit 64 can be considered. As a warning display by the error display unit and a warning sound from the speaker unit 64, there is a notification when an illegal act or a failure of the gaming machine occurs. This process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

The flowchart of FIG. 73A shows a fraud detection process executed in a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) by the main control device 81.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the magnetic force is detected by the magnetic force detection sensor provided in the gaming machine. The magnetic force detection sensor can detect, for example, that a magnetic force is applied to a predetermined ball entry portion (V winning opening 182a or the like) in order to detect the act of guiding the game ball with a magnet. If the magnetic force is not detected, in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor provided in the gaming machine. The vibration detection sensor can detect vibration in order to detect an action in which the flow mode of the game ball is changed by vibration and, for example, a predetermined ball entry portion (V winning opening 182a, etc.) is intentionally won a prize. .. If vibration is not detected, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are in the open state. If these doors 13 and 14 are not in the open state, the fraud detection process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3401 to S3403, the fraud detection process ends after the process of outputting the fraudulent command to the effect control device 82 is executed in step S3404.

The flowchart of FIG. 73B shows the fraudulent notification process executed in a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) by the staging control device 82.

First, in step SB601, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned invalid command is received. If the invalid command has not been received, the processing for unauthorized notification is terminated as it is. If an illegal command has been received, the warning notification process is executed in step SB602, and then the unauthorized notification process ends. As described above, the warning notification process is a process for causing the error display unit and the speaker unit 64 to perform warning notification.

That is, the warning notification is promptly executed when a fraudulent act or the like is detected. On the other hand, the occurrence of ball clogging or the occurrence of an error state of the winning rate based on the detection result of the passing area is only a possibility, and the occurrence of ball clogging itself can be detected, or the V winning opening 182a or the like can be won. It does not detect the fraudulent activity itself that makes it easier to do. Therefore, if the warning display or the warning sound is easily notified, the notification may be given to the player who is playing a legitimate game. Therefore, it is considered preferable that the notification of the error state is a notification in which the warning display and the notification by the warning sound are not conspicuous. On the other hand, due to the diversification of the production of gaming machines and the sophistication of production, error notification by mere display and sound is buried in the production of other gaming machines and other productions of the gaming machine, and the management of the gaming hall. May miss the error condition.

Therefore, as described above, by intentionally shifting the execution timing of the RTC effect performed at the same timing in other gaming machines, it is easy to prevent some inconvenience from occurring in the gaming machine whose timing is shifted. It becomes possible to grasp. In particular, in a situation where all gaming machines normally perform a uniform production, the configuration is such that the production is not performed. Therefore, the production of other gaming machines is used to make the non-playing machine stand out. It is possible to make it possible to attract the attention of the manager of the game hall with a simple configuration. Since the RTC effect itself is configured to be performed at a different execution timing, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player as compared with the configuration in which the RTC effect is not performed. This is because it is considered that the deviation of the RTC effect may be caused by the deviation of the power-on timing, the deviation of the update of the internal clock circuit, and the like. Further, since the execution timing of the effect originally possessed by the gaming machine is only shifted, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the effect for notifying the error state.

As a result of the above, the manager or the like of the game hall can grasp that some error has occurred based on the detection result of the passing area, and thereby the manager or the like can visually check. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately grasp errors such as ball clogging and winning rate, and perform processing corresponding to them.

The notification when the V error state shown in the twelfth embodiment (a state in which a V prize is generated even though none of the passing regions 412 to 414 has passed) is also promptly notified. From the viewpoint of the necessity of the above, it is preferable to configure the warning notification in the above-mentioned fraud notification processing.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As a notification using the passage information of the passage areas 412 to 414, the effect control device 82 is configured to notify the error state. This makes it possible for not only the manager of the game hall but also the player himself to clearly understand that the error state has been set.

While the error notification is performed based on the setting of each error state, the game stop state is not set. This is because the abnormal bias in the number of passing numbers is only a possibility that fraudulent acts have been performed, and even if the game is stopped, it should be confirmed by the manager of the game hall or the like. .. In addition, since the fraudulent notification (Fig. 73) that notifies that fraudulent activity has been performed is more flashy than the error notification and is a notification that attracts the attention of the game hall manager, etc., the game hall management. The state that requires confirmation of the player is notified step by step to facilitate the confirmation work of the player.

The comparison process is performed on both the main control device 81 side and the staging control device 82 side. As a result, the possibility of false detection due to a program error or the like can be reduced as much as possible. In particular, as described above, the error notification can be grasped in the correct state by the confirmation of the manager of the game hall, and if the error notification is erroneously notified, the confirmation work can be increased accordingly.

Instead of the configuration in which the main control device 81 and the staging control device 82 double-check as described above, a configuration in which the comparison process is performed on one side of the main control device 81 or the staging control device 82 may be used. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced. In particular, if the comparison process is performed on the staging control device 82 side, it is possible to disperse the processing load from the main control device 81 side that performs the arithmetic processing.

When an error notification is performed, the execution timing of the RTC effect is delayed. This makes it possible to highlight that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine by using the RTC effect performed on the other gaming machine.

The timing of error notification, that is, the timing of outputting an error command was set according to the timing of RTC effect. More specifically, since the error command is output before the predetermined time (5 min) when the RTC effect is performed, when the RTC effect is performed by the effect control device 82, the error command is issued before the predetermined time. It is possible to guarantee the receiving state. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which error notification is not easily performed even though the error state is set.

It should be noted that the error notification is set to a different error state depending on the trigger of the error state (either the firing number error state, the winning number error state, the V winning rate error state or the ball jam state, or the passing area 412 to 414). May be good. In this case, it is preferable that the special notification of the error state is also different depending on the trigger of the error state. Specifically, it is considered that the notification of the ball jam state is more urgent than the other error states, and in that respect, the notification of the error state based on the ball jam state is not a delay of the RTC effect, but a warning notification. It may be a notification performed each time as in. In addition, since the V winning rate error state is more closely related to the V winning than the firing number error state and the winning number error state, the error notification is made so that the strength of the relationship with these V winnings can be clearly recognized. May be configured to be different (delay timing is different, etc.).

Further, as described above, the strength of the relationship with the V prize differs depending on the passing areas 412 to 414, and the content of the error notification may be different depending on the passing areas 412 to 414 that trigger the error state. good.

Further, the error notification using the RTC effect may be limited to the notification of the ball jam state. That is, the firing number error state, the winning number error state, and the V winning rate error state are output externally to the computer of the game hall as in the twelfth embodiment, and are left to the judgment of the game hall manager or the like, and the ball is jammed. An abnormality that is relatively easy to identify, such as the occurrence of a state, may be notified by an RTC effect. Then, the game is stopped or a warning is notified for obvious injustices / abnormalities such as a V error state (a state in which a V prize is generated even though the passage area 412 to 414 has not been passed). In this way, by making the processing different according to the type of error, it is possible to take appropriate measures according to the type of error.

In the case where a ball jam condition occurs, for example, when the ball jam condition occurs but the ball is left unattended for a predetermined period (the manager of the game hall or the like is not called), the notification may be performed. .. As described above, the occurrence of a ball jam state is an event that can be visually confirmed by the player, and if such an event occurs but is left unattended, a notification is given. For example, an event that the player has already recognized will be notified, and the player will not feel uncomfortable, and will report to the manager of the game hall in order to avoid the notification. Conceivable. In this case, from the viewpoint that it is not directly linked to the profit of the player and causes a loss in the production, if the RTC production is delayed, the notification of an event that is not caused by the player's action such as ball jamming is performed. , It is possible to notify while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In the output process, in addition to the configuration in which the error command is output to the effect control device 82 side, the configuration may be such that information is output to the game hall via the external output terminal 99 shown in the twelfth embodiment. ..

<14th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution of the arithmetic processing and the comparison processing of the passing areas 412 to 414 may be restricted. FIG. 74 (a) is a flowchart showing the process for the passing region in the present embodiment.

First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the normal pass area process is executed in step S3502. The process of step S3502 is the same as the process of FIG. In the open / close execution mode, the process for the passing area is terminated without performing the process in step S3502.

That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing accessory 168 is frequently opened, and the accessory device 400 is likely to win a prize. When the winning of the accessory device 400 is likely to occur, the passing rate of the passing areas 412 to 414 is also improved. Therefore, when the normal gaming state before the opening / closing execution mode is compared with the opening / closing execution mode, the design values of the passing rates of the passing regions 412 to 414 may be significantly different. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately calculate and compare the passing rate in the normal gaming state by configuring the configuration so that the passing areas 412 to 414 are not detected, arithmetic processing, comparison processing, etc. are performed in the open / close execution mode. Become.

The present embodiment can be modified as shown in FIG. 74 (b). Specifically, when the open / close execution mode is not in step S3601, the normal pass area process is executed in step S3602, and then the main pass area process ends. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is in step S3601, the passing area processing for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S3603, and then the main passing area processing is terminated. In this modification, the winning number counter, the passing flag, etc. are set separately for the opening / closing execution mode from the normal gaming state, and in the processing for the passing area for the opening / closing execution mode, these separately provided counters and flags are set. Is used to perform the same processing as the normal passage region processing.

That is, it is configured to calculate and compare the passing rate and the V winning rate for the opening / closing execution mode separately from the passing rate and the V winning rate in the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably grasp the occurrence of various errors even in the open / close execution mode in which the winning frequency is high. In particular, in the open / close execution mode, since a large number of game balls enter the accessory device 400, the set values that serve as the judgment criteria for the winning number error state, the firing number error state, and the V winning rate error state are normal games. It can be different from the one in the state, and the occurrence of ball clogging increases. Further, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guiding the game ball to the V winning opening 182a by a route intended to be mixed with a large number of balls is also performed. Therefore, if the above modification is performed, it is possible to suitably notify the manager of the game hall or the like of the occurrence of various errors even during the opening / closing execution mode.

In the above modification, it is advisable to separately provide design values for the passing rate and the V winning rate during the opening / closing execution mode.

In the above modification, for example, as shown in the first embodiment, in a configuration (see FIG. 11) in which a 16R continuous mode and a continuous fluctuation mode are set as open / close execution modes, the type of open / close execution mode is used. Depending on the situation, it is possible to set the case where the detection and calculation processing of the passing areas 412 to 414 are performed and the case where the calculation processing is not performed, and the determination criteria for determining the error state when the detection and calculation processing are performed may be different. Here, the 16R continuation mode is an open / close execution mode in which V prizes are likely to occur in any round and rounds are easy to continue, and the continuous fluctuation mode is an open / close execution mode in which the likelihood of V prizes is different depending on each round. Is. In other words, especially in a round where V prizes are unlikely to occur in the continuous fluctuation mode, how to generate V prizes and continue the round is the key to the game, but if you are trying to make a profit for fraudulent purposes, It is considered that the V-winning rate of the round in which this V-winning is unlikely to occur is to be improved. In that respect, for example, in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode as the open / close execution mode, if the passage areas 412 to 414 are detected and the arithmetic processing is performed, the V winning rate is illegally increased as described above. It becomes possible to identify the action. Further, from that point of view, at least in the round (8R, 11R, see FIG. 27) in which the V winning rate is low in the open / close execution mode of the continuous fluctuation mode, the passage regions 412 to 414 may be detected and arithmetically processed. ..

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, it is possible to win a prize in the accessory device 150 based on the winning in the operating openings 38 and 39, and when the winning game ball further wins in the V winning opening 182a, the opening / closing execution mode In the gaming machine that shifts to, the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed by the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201, but the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed. The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured not to include at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310, or it may be configured not to include the rotating body 201. In short, in a configuration in which the winning game ball in the accessory device 150 is distributed to the V winning opening 182a or the out-of-winning opening 182b, the distribution may be distributed by the distribution unit in which a predetermined operation is performed. ..

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is different as a configuration for changing the winning timing to the accessory device 150, but the point is that the winning timing to the accessory device 150 is changed. It suffices if it is possible to change the subsequent V winning rate by changing it, and the V winning rate is changed by changing the operation pattern of another accessory instead of the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168. It may be configured. However, if the other bonus is a bonus in the bonus device 150, an event occurs in which the prize is not won due to a change in the operation pattern of the other bonus even though the prize is won in the bonus device 150. This can give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, the above-mentioned other accessory may be something outside the accessory device 150 that changes the winning timing to the accessory device 150.

(3) The operation start of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set as the opening timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, but other timing may be used as long as a predetermined specific event (predetermined event) occurs. .. That is, it may be the start timing of the round game, or it may be the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the opening or closing of the opening / closing accessory 168 or the start of the round game.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, in the open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode, the eighth round is set to the open / close pattern B, the eleventh round is set to the open / close pattern C, and the continuation rate is lowered in these rounds. The composition of the opening / closing pattern of each round is not limited to the above. For example, all the rounds after the predetermined round such as the eighth round may be set as low continuation rounds such as the opening / closing pattern B, or all the rounds up to the predetermined round may be set as low continuation rounds, and the rounds after the predetermined round may be high continuation. It may be a round (opening / closing pattern A). Further, an opening / closing pattern that is easier to continue than the opening / closing pattern A (high V winning probability) or an opening / closing pattern that is harder to continue than B or C (low V winning probability) may be set. By including the rounds of these opening / closing patterns in the opening / closing patterns of each round, it is possible to diversify the opening / closing patterns.

Further, the opening / closing pattern of all rounds may be configured to be an opening / closing pattern (opening / closing patterns B and C) that is difficult to continue. In this case, all the rounds may be the opening / closing pattern B, all the rounds may be the opening / closing pattern C, the opening / closing pattern may be more difficult to continue than the opening / closing patterns B and C, or a combination thereof may be used. good.

Further, conversely, the opening / closing pattern of all rounds may be an opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern A) that is easy to continue.

The open / close execution mode configured by each of the above open / close patterns may be changed from the open / close execution mode of the open / close execution mode of the continuation rate fluctuation mode in the first embodiment, or all or any of the open / close execution modes. May be added, or each opening / closing execution mode may be combined and added to the first embodiment.

(5) In the second embodiment described above, the V winning probability is changed by changing the opening / closing pattern twice (opening / closing based on winning the second operating port 39), but the opening / closing once. The pattern may be changed, or the number of times of opening and closing may be changed. For example, in a configuration in which the opening / closing pattern is changed once, the opening time is set so that the operation pattern is such that the distribution members 300 and 310 do not easily distribute to the V winning side in the normal opening result, and a predetermined result is obtained. Then, the opening time of the opening / closing accessory may be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 to facilitate distribution to the V winning side.

(6) As a configuration in which the V winning probability is changed (opening / closing pattern is changed) depending on the game result as in the second embodiment, the result of changing the V winning probability depending on the game state (special opening A result or special opening B result). It may be configured so that the probabilities of are different.

(7) Although the configuration for improving the V winning probability has been described in detail as a configuration for changing the V winning probability by changing the opening / closing pattern, a configuration for reducing the V winning probability may be used.

(8) Even if the opening / closing patterns are different, even if the opening / closing patterns are provided so that the accessory device 150 wins almost V prize (distributed to the V winning side) even if the distribution members 300 and 310 are not provided. good. In this case, it is preferable to grasp the rotation position of the rotating body 201 and determine the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168. Even in this configuration, the V winning probability can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

(9) As a configuration for changing the V winning probability by grasping the rotation position of the rotating body 201 and changing the opening / closing pattern, for example, the following configuration can be considered.

As a game result (result table) based on the winning of the operating openings 38 and 39, a special opening C result capable of changing the opening / closing pattern is provided. When this special open C result is obtained, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped based on the detection result of the rotating position detection sensor 196. For example, when the game ball winning in the accessory device 150 is not distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, the period until it is led out from the lead-out unit 186 to the recess 182 (ball guide unit 202) is defined as the arrival period. Then, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 is set from the relationship between the arrival period and the period during which the V winning opening guide unit 204 rotates to the position corresponding to the out-licensing unit 186. By doing so, it is possible to set a pattern in which V winning is likely to occur when the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open state, without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, it takes about 0.3 sec for the game ball winning the accessory device 150 to reach the position to be distributed by the second distribution member 310, and the first distribution member The passage length is set so that it takes about 0.2 sec from the position on the second distribution member 310 side to reach the position to be distributed by the 300, but this configuration should be changed. Also, as described above, the probability of being distributed to the off side depending on the relationship between the period in which the opening / closing accessory 168 is in the open / closed state and the period in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state. It is also possible to change the probability of being distributed to the V winning side.

(11) In the above embodiment, the mode of support by the electric accessory 39a is set not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. Specifically, for example, as a support mode, the electric accessory 39a of the second operating port 39 is opened per unit period when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area in the same manner. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the states is relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric accessory open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening period is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 39a is won in the open state and the open state of the electric accessory 39a occurs multiple times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (that is, that is). The duration of one display on the accessory display unit 44) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 will be in the open state is high, and the probability of winning a V (occurrence of a big hit) is also high. Further, as in the second embodiment, in the configuration in which not only the number of times the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened but also the game result (big hit type) is different between the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39. In the mode in which the probability of winning the 2 operating openings 39 increases (high frequency support mode), the game result (big hit type, special opening A, B in the above second embodiment) set for the second operating opening 39 is obtained. The probability is high. Further, if the second operating port 39 is frequently won, the prize balls associated therewith can also be obtained frequently, and as a player, the player should not reduce the number of balls held so much in this high frequency support mode. You can play the game while playing. In this way, the advantage can be changed by using the high and low of the support mode, and the game can be diversified.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit period is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. Further, the securing period secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the accessory display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 41). In a configuration where multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter reservation period or the average reservation period is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions of shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability, or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced. ..

(12) In the second embodiment, the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are configured to have different game result result tables to generate high and low advantages. The same result table may be used as in the embodiment. Specifically, the special opening A result and the special opening B result may be provided in the result table for the first operating port. In this case, even though the first operating port 38 is won, the opening is actually performed twice, which makes the player feel profitable, and in these special opening A results and special opening B results. Since the probability of winning V is increased, even if it is difficult for the second operating port 39 to win a prize, it is expected that the winning of the first operating port 38 will result in a special opening A result or the like. It becomes possible.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the description is based on the premise that the hold information is acquired based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 each). However, the hold information may not be stored. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified. However, in the configuration in which the hold information is not stored as described above, for example, when the winning of the operating ports 38, 39 occurs again during the control of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operating ports 38, 39, etc. However, even though the operating openings 38 and 39 have been won, the opening / closing accessory 168 is not opened by that amount, which may make the player feel lost, and the interest in the game is reduced. It could be. Further, in the above embodiment, not only the accessory device 150 but also the operating ports 38 and 39 can win a prize during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, in the configuration on the side where the hold information is stored, if the hold information for that amount is digested after the open / close execution mode and the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened / closed due to the digestion of the hold information, a V prize is opened / closed. The execution mode will be a series of villas. As a result, the game can be made on the premise of the occurrence of the consecutive villas, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in a predetermined state, for example, when a prize is won in the operating ports 38 and 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or in the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information is acquired, and in other cases. May be configured not to acquire pending information. By doing so, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of loss to the player when the operating ports 38 and 39 are won a prize during the control of the accessory device 150 or the opening / closing execution mode as described above. ..

Further, the game result of the reserved information acquired during the above-mentioned predetermined state may be configured so that the special opening A result or the special opening B result is likely to occur. Generally, the player expects a prize in the opening / closing accessory 168 while the opening / closing accessory 168 is open. Then, if the holding information is acquired as described above when the opening / closing accessory 168 is not won during the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168, the opening / closing accessory 168 may not be won. However, it can be expected that the operating ports 38 and 39 will win a prize. Then, if the game result based on the winning is the special opening A result or the special opening B result (the result of the opening / closing pattern in which the V winning is likely to occur) as described above, the opening / closing combination during the opening of the opening / closing accessory 168. It is possible to make a novel game such as expecting a prize not only on the object 168 side but also on the operating ports 38 and 39. In this way, it is possible to further improve the interest.

(14) In the above embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 is different, such as the opening / closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, the special opening A result, and the special opening B result. The V winning probability is changed without changing the operation patterns of the drive units 300, 310, 201 in the device 150, but these opening / closing patterns and the operation patterns of the drive units 300, 310, 201 are examples. Therefore, the V winning probability may be changed by combining other patterns.

(15) In the second embodiment, the V winning probability is not different from the other cases (normal opening result) at the first opening start timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 in the special opening A result and the special opening B result. However, the V winning probability may be changed by changing the first opening start timing. In this case, for example, in the case of the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the opening timing according to the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 in the accessory device 150 is set regardless of the opening type counter CS. It may be configured to be set. If the opening timing is notified by, for example, a symbol display device 51 or the like (character display such as "Let's win a prize in XX seconds!"), The degree of attention to the game can be further increased. On the other hand, if the opening timing is not notified (notification only that the result is a special opening A or B such as "If you win a prize!"), It is possible to suppress the aiming and win a V prize depending on the skill level of the player. It is possible to eliminate the high and low rates and ensure the fairness of the game.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 81 has a detection means (sensor) for detecting fraudulent activity and a means for executing a corresponding process based on the detection result (for example, a normal operation which is periodically activated). It may be configured to have (added as one process in the process). In particular, in the above embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode is started by the V prize to the bonus device 150, and the round game can be continued by the V prize, so that the act of illegally generating the V prize to the bonus device 150 is performed. is assumed. As this action, for example, magnetism, radio waves, or vibration can be considered, and a detection sensor for detecting them (magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc.) is provided, and the progress of the game is stopped based on the detection result of the detection sensor. And notification, and notification to the game hall (external output) may be performed. Further, in the second embodiment, since the opening / closing pattern in which the V winning probability is increased is set, the opening / closing pattern is used, that is, the winning of the second operating port 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) is illegal. The prize for the second operating port 39 (detection of the sensor 39c) is illegal at the timing when the special opening A result or the special opening B result is likely to occur, such as by reading the update cycle of the jackpot random number counter C1 by some method. It is also assumed that the act will occur. That is, by providing a configuration (a detection sensor for magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc. and a means for performing processing based on the detection result) that suppresses an act of illegally generating an opening / closing pattern that increases the probability of winning a V, such as these, V While increasing the winning probability and improving the interest, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally generating it.

(17) In the case of the configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration may be such that the electric accessory 39a and the through gate 41 itself are not provided. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, when a V prize is generated in the open / close control during the normal gaming state, the V prize flag is set (step S1104), the open / close control is terminated, and the open / close execution mode is executed as it is. However, the opening / closing control may be continued even if a V prize is generated. In this way, even after the V prize is won during the opening / closing control, the prize device 150 can be won, and even though the prize device 150 is likely to be won (that is, the privilege and the prize ball based on it). However, since the V prize was generated, it was not possible to win the prize in the accessory device 150, and it was possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that made the player feel lost. On the other hand, when a V prize occurs, the configuration that immediately notifies it and shifts to the open / close execution mode is closer to the V prize occurrence timing and the open / close execution mode occurrence timing. It becomes clear whether the V winning is generated by the ball and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode of the game ball. Therefore, in order to solve these conflicting problems, for example, by grasping the operation patterns of the rotating body 201 and the distribution members 300 and 310, in the opening / closing control based on one hold information, the accessory device 150 is awarded a prize. The opening / closing pattern may be set so that the V winning rate is higher when it occurs at the later timing (second timing) than when it occurs at the earlier timing (first timing). In this way, in the first place, the occurrence of the V prize is more likely to occur at the later timing in one open / close control, and after the V prize is generated, the event that the accessory device 150 may be further won. It can be less likely to occur.

(19) The timing at which the V prize is generated may be set in relation to the firing cycle of the game ball. More specifically, for example, assuming that the opening / closing bonus 168 in the bonus device 150 is maintained in an open state for a period shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball (for example, 0.3 sec). During the period in which the open state is maintained, winning a prize in the accessory device 150 is less likely to occur. However, for example, even if a period shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set as a period for maintaining the open state, depending on the launch timing of the game ball, the accessory device 150 may be reached in a situation where the game ball is just in the open state. In some cases, you can get (win). Then, if a prize is won in the accessory device 150, the V winning rate changes depending on the operation pattern of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150, as described above. Therefore, in the opening / closing timing setting process, the firing cycle of the game ball is grasped, the presence or absence of the possibility of winning the accessory device 150 is grasped based on the firing cycle, and the V winning rate is changed based on the possibility of winning. It is advisable to set the opening / closing pattern so that the pattern is set.

(20) The inlet sensor 179 may be provided corresponding to the left and right opening / closing accessories 168, respectively. That is, in each of the above embodiments, even if any of the opening / closing accessories 168 wins a prize in the accessory device 150, the configuration is such that the same inlet sensor 179 detects the prize. It may be configured to detect the winning of the game ball by a separate entrance sensor. By doing so, when a prize is generated in the accessory device 150, it can be detected more quickly, and in a configuration in which the V prize rate differs depending on the left and right prize routes, the notification corresponding to it ( For example, if a prize is won from the winning route on the side where V is easy to win, notification to that effect) can be performed. More specifically, in the above embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left side of the guide passage 183, and for example, the rate of distribution to the left guide passage 183 differs depending on the left and right winning paths. In this case, it is considered that the player is more interested in winning the prize from the winning route having a high rate of being distributed to the guidance passage 183 on the right side. Therefore, if the winning is notified after the winning, the player does not have to be always interested in the movement of the game ball, and can enjoy the game relaxedly. In such a configuration in which the V winning rate differs depending on the left and right winning paths, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing accessory 168 can be determined without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 as in the above embodiment. By applying the invention of changing the V winning rate by making the opening / closing pattern different, it is possible to change the V winning rate more strictly, and it is possible to diversify the game.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the game ball that has been distributed (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 is always given a V prize, but a part of the game ball is awarded on the off side. May be good.

(22) As the result of the hit / fail judgment (game result), in addition to the normal opening result, the disconnection result, the direct hit result, and the special opening A result and the special opening B result having the same opening number but different opening / closing patterns are provided. However, other results may be provided. For example, the result that the number of times of opening is different (the result of opening twice in the result table for the first operating port, the result of opening once in the result table for the second operating port), or the result of opening the same number of times but opening Results such as a result in which the state is maintained for a different period (a result in which the state is maintained longer than usual and a result in which the state is maintained may be shorter) may be provided. Even if these results are used, the V winning rate can be adjusted from the relationship between the period during which the open state is maintained in the results and the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201.

(23) In the normal game state, the opening / closing patterns are made different by using the result of the hit / fail determination (game result), but the following configuration may be applied. For example, a counter for determining whether or not the game is successful and a counter for determining the type of game result are provided. Then, in the determination using the counter for determining whether or not the game is correct, only whether or not the open state is to be determined is determined, and in the determination using the counter for determining the type of the game result, the type of opening / closing pattern (that is, the second execution) is performed. Whether it is a normal opening or a special opening like the form) is decided. By doing so, the processing configuration of each determination process can be simplified. For example, in a configuration in which the look-ahead notification is executed using the reserved information, only the open result is set as the look-ahead notification. In the case of a configuration for performing notification, it is only necessary to read the counter for determining whether or not the hold information is correct, and the configuration for pre-reading notification can be simplified.

(24) As the hold information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39, and the type (big hit type) of the opening / closing execution mode is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. A counter for determining the type of opening / closing execution mode at the time of winning a prize may be acquired, and the type of opening / closing execution mode may be determined based on the counter. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter used at the time of V winning at the time of winning the operating ports 38 and 39 even though the V winning has not occurred, and the processing configuration is simplified. Can be achieved. However, for example, when determining the opening / closing pattern, a configuration that reflects the type of opening / closing execution mode at the time of V winning, specifically, for example, in the 16R continuous mode, the V winning rate is increased / decreased in the continuous fluctuation mode. If there is a configuration such as increasing / decreasing the V winning rate, it is preferable to acquire a jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of opening / closing execution mode as hold information. In addition, when the open / close control is executed or in the look-ahead notification, the type of open / close execution mode when a V prize is won at the open / close control corresponding to the hold information is notified (for example, "Get 16R continuous mode if you win here!" Even in the display such as ""), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the open / close execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode is started by detecting the V winning in the winning process in the game control process, but the opening / closing execution mode may be changed as follows. That is, the first round in the open / close execution mode is started based on the winning of the operating openings 38 and 39, and in the game control process, the presence or absence of continuation of the first round is determined by the presence or absence of the V winning. do. In this case, in the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning of the first operating port 38, the round game in which the number of times of opening once (RC2) is easily executed, and the second operating port 39 is won. In the first round (RC1) of the opening / closing execution mode based on the above, the round game in which the number of times of opening (RC2) is twice is easily executed. Then, in each opening / closing number of the first round of the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning of each operating port 38, 39, the opening / closing accessory 168 is not different in the operation patterns of the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201. By making the opening / closing pattern different, the V winning rate is made different, and the continuation rate of the round game is made different. Even in this way, it is possible to exert a unique effect by each of the above-mentioned characteristic configurations.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, the digestion order (order to be subject to the winning / failing determination) of the holding information based on the winning of the first operating port 38 and the holding information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 is determined. Although the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 is given priority, the hold information may be obtained in the order of acquisition. For example, the determination of whether or not the hold information is based on the winning of the second operating port 39 is more advantageous than the determination of whether or not the holding information is based on the winning of the first operating port 38 (the opening / closing pattern in which the V winning is likely to occur). In the configuration in which (possible to be set) is performed, the player also wants to first execute the pass / fail judgment regarding the reserved information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 as in the above embodiment. There is also a desire to postpone it (keeping the opening / closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur later) and first execute the pass / fail judgment of the hold information based on the winning of the first operating port 38. By entrusting the player's swaying feelings to a random order not intended by the player, such as a winning order for the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, the game is made more diverse. It becomes possible.

Further, if a configuration in which the winning rate to the second operating port 39 is different is applied by using the height of the support mode of the electric accessory 39a, the holding based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in each of the above embodiments is applied. In a configuration in which the winning / failing determination of information is prioritized, the order of winning / failing of the reserved information based on the winning of the first operating port 38 may be continued to be deferred due to the frequent winning of the second operating port 39. , The difference between the timing of winning the first operating port 38 and the timing of determining whether or not the reserved information is based on the winning may be large. If the difference between the winning timing and the winning / failing judgment becomes large, for example, even if a fraudulent act such as making a winning / failing judgment is executed even though no winning has occurred, the manager of the game hall It can be difficult to spot it. Then, the delay in discovering the fraudulent activity may lead to the inconvenience that the fraudulent activity may be more likely to occur. Therefore, if the winning / failing judgment is performed in the order of winning as described above, the difference between the winning / failing judgment timing can be minimized, and as a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities. Become.

(27) As an example of the configuration in which the number of reserved information to be reserved based on the winning of each operating port 38 or 39 is stored up to 4 in each case, the number may be less than 3 or 5 The number may be more than one, or the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on the winning of each of the operating ports 38 and 39 may be different from each other. For example, each of the actuation ports 38 and 39 may be configured to store one hold information. By doing so, for example, the possibility that the consecutive villas after the open / close execution mode will be triggered due to the excessive accumulation of hold information during the open / close execution mode is reduced, and the range of increase / decrease in the number of balls released is reduced to provide mild playability. It becomes possible to.

(28) The hold light emitting units 54 to 56 may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Where the symbol display device 51 is configured to be provided on the upper part of the bonus device 150, the player can operate the game ball centering on the bonus device 150, such as winning a prize in the bonus device 150 and then winning a V prize. It is considered that the person is highly interested in the aspect, and if the number of reserved information is displayed in a place close to the place of such interest (that is, the display screen G), it naturally comes into view. it is conceivable that. By doing so, it is possible to centralize information and make the game easier to understand, as compared with a configuration in which different notifications are performed using various points. However, in each of the above embodiments, when the mode is changed to the open / close execution mode, the type (15R continuous mode, continuous fluctuation mode) is notified on the display screen G, and the number of reserved pieces is notified on the display screen G. As a configuration, when notifying the type of the open / close execution mode, the display of the information on the number of reserved pieces is deleted, or the type of the open / close execution mode is notified while leaving the information on the number of held pieces. In the former case, there may be an inconvenience that even if the number of pending information is confirmed, it cannot be performed when the notification of the type of open / close execution mode is performed, and in the latter case, the effect area becomes small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the notification of the type of opening / closing execution mode itself may be sober. Therefore, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of hold information even though the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 are provided, even if the display of the number of hold information is deleted on the display screen G, at that time. Can be confirmed by the reserved light emitting units 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed according to the timing.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, in the game control process, if the accessory control state is in progress, the subsequent pending information is not digested, but it may be changed as follows. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the character device 150 during the bonus control state, and whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V winning sensor 192 or the detachment sensor 193. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball that has won the prize in the bonus device 150 is still present in the bonus device 150, and if it is present in the bonus device 150, the opening / closing bonus 168 is closed and the bonus is closed. Even if the control state is terminated, the subsequent pending information is not digested. In this way, the consciousness of watching the prizes of each accessory device 150 more importantly grows, and as a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, based on the occurrence of a V prize for the accessory device 150, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, and in the open / close execution mode, the prize for the accessory device 150 is likely to occur. However, the open / close execution mode may be executed by another winning device. For example, a variable ball-entry device capable of displacing a game ball flowing down a game area into an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter is provided, and a V to the accessory device 150 is provided. The configuration is such that the main control device 81 controls the variable ball entry device to be in the open state based on the occurrence of a prize or the like. Then, the opening / closing execution mode of the 16R continuous mode may be executed in the variable winning device, or the opening / closing execution mode of the continuous variable mode may be executed in the variable winning device. In the former case, as for the continuous variation mode, the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is different by changing the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing accessory 168 as in each of the above embodiments, and the continuation rate of the round game is adjusted. It is possible. Further, in the latter case, a V winning opening and an out-of-winning opening are provided in the variable ball-entry device, and a distribution section for distributing the winning to each winning opening is provided in the upstream portion of each of these winning openings. This distribution unit is operated in a predetermined operation pattern, and the game ball that has won a prize in the variable winning device is distributed to the V winning opening and the out-of-winning opening. Then, as the continuous fluctuation mode, the switching timing between the open state and the closed state is changed so as to change the winning timing to the variable winning device without changing the operation pattern of the distribution unit, and the V winning opening is reached. Adjust the winning rate of. In this way, it is possible to replace or in addition to the configuration in which the continuation rate of the round game is changed in the accessory device 150, that it can be realized by another winning device.

(31) The gaming ball subjected to V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is configured to be led out to the warp passage 250 as a region where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than that, but the gaming machine. The configuration may be such that the V prize is generated by passing through the region where the visibility from the front does not change, or the V prize may be generated by passing through the region where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved. By doing so, it is possible to easily confirm that the V distribution has been performed not only by reducing the visibility of the game ball but also by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in a configuration such as this pachinko machine 10, where the greatest attention is paid to whether or not a V prize is generated, it is easier to raise the degree of attention by making the V distribution more prominent. It is thought that it will be. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine does not decrease (does not change / improves) during V distribution as in the above configuration, the subsequent operation of the gaming ball can be fully visualized. It is preferable to increase the degree of attention.

However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the act of aiming to intentionally generate V distribution, the visibility of the game ball after V distribution is performed and the place where V distribution is performed (the place where V distribution is performed). It is preferable not to excessively enhance the visibility of the region provided with the second distribution member 310).

In that respect, in each of the above embodiments, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, which has a relatively low visibility from the front of the gaming machine, and the first distribution member 300, which has a relatively high visibility from the front of the gaming machine. Since the V winning rate is changed by combining the out-of-order distribution and the operation patterns of both distribution members 300 and 310, the first distribution member 300 causes inconvenience due to a decrease in visibility from the front of the gaming machine. In addition to covering, the inconvenience caused by improving visibility from the front of the gaming machine is covered by the second distribution member 310, and by coexisting both, it is possible to compensate for each inconvenience of high and low visibility. It has become.

(32) The game ball that has won a prize in the bonus device 150 is discharged to the outside of the bonus device 150 by the V winning passage 191a or the exit passage 191b, and the discharged game ball is a pachinko machine through a discharge passage (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of 10, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150.

(33) By changing the opening / closing standby time and the fluctuation display time of the game times, the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201 from the time of digesting the hold information or the end of the opening / closing execution mode as the occurrence of a predetermined event The configuration is such that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed without changing the operation pattern, but as in the second embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of the double opening, the first and second open states are used. The V winning rate can be increased by individually or in combination of a configuration in which the period in which the game is maintained is different, or a configuration in which the waiting time between the first and second open states and the open state is changed. It may be configured to be changed.

(34) In the ninth embodiment, the larger the common hold number CRN, the shorter the variable display time, and as a result, the configuration is such that duplication with the V distribution is likely to occur, but the timing at which the V distribution is performed. May be configured so that duplication with the V distribution is more likely to occur when the variable display time is set to be slower and the variable display time is longer. In this case, the variable display time may be longer as the common hold number CRN is larger, or the period in which the open / close accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is set longer as the common hold number CRN is larger. The configuration may be such that duplication with minutes is likely to occur.

(35) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is set according to the common hold number CRN regardless of the gaming state, but the mode is to set the variable display time according to the common hold number CRN. You may set a mode that does not.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), as the jackpot type, in addition to the 16R continuation mode and the continuation fluctuation mode in each of the above embodiments, the jackpot result of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is set. .. The open / close execution mode of the 2R continuation mode is an open / close execution mode in which the round game is performed only twice (or only once). For example, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by winning a V in the second round, the open / close execution mode is It shall be terminated. Therefore, it is assumed that the open / close execution mode of the 2R continuous mode obtains fewer prize balls than the other open / close execution modes.

FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the setting process of the variable display time of this modification. The variable display time setting process is a process executed in step S1706 of the game control process (FIG. 45).

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the special mode. The special mode is a mode that is set when the previous open / close execution mode is the above-mentioned 2R continuation mode, and is set in the end process (step S1215) of the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). Will be done. When the current gaming state is not the special mode, a process of setting a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 sec) predetermined in step S2202 as a variable display time is executed, and this setting process is terminated. In this case, if a prize is generated in the accessory device 150 immediately after the start of the opening operation of the opening / closing accessory 168, V distribution may occur, but in other cases, V distribution does not occur.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the special mode, the variable display time (see FIG. 46A) according to the common hold number CRN is set in step S2203, and then the setting process is terminated. As described above, the larger the common hold number CRN, the more the variable display time in which V distribution is likely to occur can be selected. Since the common hold number CRN tends to increase (hold information tends to be accumulated) during the open / close execution mode, the occurrence rate of the open / close execution mode increases by setting the special mode.

By doing so, even after the opening / closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, which is not advantageous for the player, it becomes easier to shift to the opening / closing execution mode after that, and it is possible to compensate for the disadvantageous portion.

In the above configuration, in the 2R continuation mode, even if a V prize is generated in the middle of the round game, the round game may be continued until the maximum number of prizes is reached. By doing so, the common hold number CRN tends to increase during the open / close execution mode, and it becomes possible to anticipate the consecutive villas after the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the above configuration, in the V winning (generation of big hit) in the special mode, a distribution table for each mode may be provided so that the 2R continuation mode can be easily selected. By doing so, it is possible to create a new game in which the 2R continuation mode with few balls is extended endlessly, and as a result, a large number of balls can be obtained.

Further, in the above configuration, if, for example, the electric accessory 39a is supported in the special mode, the common hold number CRN can be easily accumulated, and as a result, a continuous villa in the open / close execution mode can be expected.

(36) The type of jackpot described in each of the above embodiments is an example, and other jackpot types may be provided. For example, even in the 2R continuous mode, the upper limit of the number of rounds may be set in the continuous variable mode so that if the V prize does not occur in the first round, the game ends in the first round. The configuration may be such that the selection rate of the opening / closing pattern differs depending on the round. For example, a jackpot of 5R continuous fluctuation mode in which the upper limit of the number of rounds of continuous fluctuation mode is 5 rounds is provided, and 5R continuous fluctuation mode A in which an opening / closing pattern A having a high round continuation rate is easily selected in each round, and each round. 5R continuous fluctuation mode B, in which an opening / closing pattern B having a low round continuation rate can be easily selected, may be provided.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the game state shifts from the previous game state to a predetermined game state because the game state shifts to the bonus control state or the game round is started based on the reserved information being digested. It can be said that the game state is changed from the previous game state to a predetermined game state based on the fact that the hold information is digested and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is started as a result of the hit / fail determination. It can be said that the game state has changed, and it can be said that the game state has changed from the previous game state to a predetermined game state based on the end of the open / close execution mode.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing accessory 168 may perform a predetermined operation based on the holding information being digested, that is, at the start of the open waiting time or the start of the game round. .. The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation suggesting that the game ball cannot enter the accessory device 150, but moves slightly from the closed state to the open state side and can be in the open state. Conceivable.

(39) Each of the above inventions can be applied to the following configurations. That is, the unit switching control (so-called round) in which the game board 24 switches between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter or cannot enter than in the open state. A variable ball entry device capable of executing a game) will be provided. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the lottery result based on the winning of any of the operating ports 38 and 39 is a big hit result, and the predetermined notification unit notifies it). As an advantageous state for the player, the variable ball entry device is shifted to a special gaming state (so-called jackpot state) in which the unit switching control is performed a plurality of times. Further, in the variable ball entry device, distribution is performed to determine whether the game ball that has entered the device is passed through the first passing portion (for example, the V zone) or the second passing portion (normal zone) different from the first passing portion (for example, the V zone). Install the device. In the special gaming state, it is possible to shift to the next unit switching control on condition that the player has passed to the first passing unit during one unit switching control. Even in such a configuration, if the switching timing in the unit switching control is changed, the passing rate to the first passing portion side (that is, the continuation of the unit switching control) is continued without changing the sorting timing on the sorting device side. Rate) can be changed. By doing so, for example, the number of times the unit switching control is actually performed by changing the continuation rate while notifying the upper limit of the number of times (the number of rounds) the unit switching control is performed in one special gaming state. It is possible to realize a game such as paying attention to (passing to the first passing portion). That is, not only for a simple game such as entering a ball into a variable ball entry device, but also for the timing of entering the ball into the variable ball entry device, the opening timing of the variable ball entry device, and the flow mode of the game ball. It is possible to realize a game such as attracting attention, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

(40) In the configuration of (39) above, the continuation condition in the unit switching control is that the game ball passes through the first passing portion side, but it may be changed as follows. For example, based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery result based on winning a prize in any of the operating ports 38 or 39 is a big hit result, and the predetermined notification unit notifies it). The variable ball entry device is configured to be switched and controlled to the open state, and by passing the game ball to the first passing portion during the open state, the variable ball entry device or the variable ball entry device and the variable ball entry device are advantageous to the player. Is configured to shift to a special gaming state (so-called jackpot state) in which unit switching control of different variable ball entry devices is performed. Even in such a configuration, if the timing of opening (or closing) is changed, the passing rate to the first passing portion (special game) without changing the sorting timing on the sorting device side. The transition rate to the state) can be changed. That is, the occurrence rate of the special gaming state is changed not only by the winning probability of the lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 38 and 39 and the entry rate into the variable entry device, but also by the opening / closing pattern of the variable entry device. It becomes possible to diversify the game.

(41) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the arithmetic processing is performed based on the passing information of the left passing area 412, the right passing area 413, and the back passing area 414 in the accessory device 150. The information is not limited to the area within the accessory device 150. That is, it suffices as long as it is a region within the game area PE through which the game ball can pass, and more preferably, it is on the upstream side of the ball entry portion (first actuating port 38, second actuating port 39, etc.) where the game ball can enter. It may be an area arranged in.

(42) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the arithmetic processing is configured to calculate the passing rate for the number of shots, the passing rate for each winning number, and the V winning rate for each passing number, but at least passing. Any configuration may be used in which arithmetic processing is performed using the passing information of the areas 412 to 414. For example, it may be configured to perform arithmetic processing between the passing information of the passing areas 412 to 414. Specifically, the ratio of the number of passages of the right passage region 413 to the number of passages of the left passage region 412 or the number of passages of the back passage region 414 to the number of passages of the left and right passage regions 421 and 413 may be calculated. The deviation rate for the number of passages in each passage region 412 to 414 may be calculated. Further, when performing arithmetic processing in relation to the number of balls entering a predetermined entry portion such as the V winning opening 182a, the number of passages in the passing region arranged on the upstream side of the predetermined entry portion is not limited. , The arithmetic processing may be performed in relation to the predetermined number of balls passing through the ball and the passing area of the passing area arranged in another area.

(43) In the thirteenth embodiment, the error notification is performed based on the information such as the error command. For example, the passing area having a high V winning rate can be displayed by the symbol display device 51 or the like, or the launch ball. It may be configured to display the passing rate per number. In this way, as a player, it is possible to obtain information for winning a V prize, and it is possible to encourage active participation in the game by making it useful for the game.

(44) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the pass rate for the number of launching balls is calculated, but instead of or in addition to this, the pass rate per unit time may be calculated. By doing so, it is not necessary to measure the number of launched balls, and the processing can be simplified. However, if the passing rate per unit time is used, for example, the time when the game is not played may be added. In this case, the time when the game is played is grasped as the time when the game ball is launched, for example. Then, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the passing rate for that time is calculated. Further, the passing rate may be based on the number of winnings in the accessory device 400. Specifically, the calculation may be performed based on the detection result only in the bonus device 400, such as the passing rate for the bonus device 400 winning and the V winning rate for passing the passing areas 412 to 414 (FIG. 66). .. In this case, it is possible to grasp the habit of the accessory device 400 itself regardless of the entry rate to the other entry section or the entry rate to the accessory device 400. In general, the accessory that the game ball can enter and the game ball that has entered is distributed to various routes is industrially mass-produced, so that the distribution rate of each route is uniform. It is considered. On the other hand, individual differences such as differences in the distribution rate of each route may occur due to production fluctuations and mounting methods. In that respect, if the habit of the accessory device 400 can be specified as a configuration in which the calculation is performed based on the detection result in the accessory device 400 as described above, not only the distribution rate in the design but also the accessory device 400 Data can be managed in consideration of individual differences such as habits. For example, the passage rate of the left passage region 412 should be lower than that of other accessory devices 400 due to individual differences, but the left passage area is left. When the passing rate of 412 is high, it can be greatly useful for finding fraud or abnormality.

(45) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, as a comparison process, an error state is set when the value exceeds + 10% with respect to the design value and when the value is less than -10%, but only when the value exceeds + 10%. It may be configured to be in an error state. At least, if it is less than -10%, there should be no disadvantage from the game hall side. Further, the error rate as an error state with respect to the design value is not limited to plus or minus 10%, and may be an error rate higher than plus or minus 10% (up to plus or minus 100%), or an error rate lower than plus or minus 10. It may be (~ 0%). In this case, the error state may be set in a plurality of stages according to the error rate. Specifically, for example, if an error is determined with an error rate of plus or minus 5%, the first error state is set, and if an error is determined with an error rate of plus or minus 15%, the second error state is set. In the first error state, only the external output of the game hall to the hall computer is used as in the twelfth embodiment, and in the second error state, in addition to the external output to the hall computer, the staging control is performed as in the thirteenth embodiment. The device 82 is also configured to perform notification. Further, the game may be stopped for obvious abnormalities such as an error rate of plus or minus 50%.

(46) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passing rate for each winning number to the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 is calculated, but instead of or in addition to this, opening and closing is performed. It may be configured to calculate the passing rate with respect to the number of times of opening and closing of the accessory 168. As described above, basically, the opening / closing accessory 168 is opened once for each winning of the first operating port 38, and twice for each winning of the second operating port 39. This is because, for example, in the case of the disconnection result (FIG. 11), the opening / closing accessory 168 is not in the open state, so that the number of winnings and the number of opening / closing are not completely linked.

(47) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the main control device 81 is configured to grasp the passing information of the passing areas 412 to 414, perform arithmetic processing, and the like, but the staging control device 82 is used to perform the passing area 412. It may be configured to grasp the passing information of ~ 414 and perform arithmetic processing. By doing so, in the case of the configuration in which the effect control device 82 performs error notification as in the twelfth embodiment, it is not necessary to output an error command, the number of commands can be reduced, and the processing configuration can be simplified. Can be planned. In particular, the passing areas 412 to 414 are different from the ball entry portion where the prize ball is generated, and are merely for using the passed information. It is considered that no problem will occur even if the passage information is grasped. Then, when performing arithmetic processing using the ball entry information to the ball entry section (information of the winning number counter) in addition to the pass information of the pass areas 412 to 414, the main control device 81 transfers to the ball entry section. It may be configured to receive the ball entry information separately as a command, or it may receive a command (hold command, etc.) to output the ball entry information to the effect control device 82 when the ball enters the conventional ball entry section. Based on the above, a counter for effect processing may be added by 1.

(48) In the thirteenth embodiment, the set time of the RTC effect is not limited to that of FIG. 70 (b). At least, the set time may be set so as to be a timing that can occur a plurality of times within the business hours of the game hall.

(49) In the thirteenth embodiment, the set time for error command output is not limited to that of FIG. 70 (b). At least, the set time may be set so as to be a timing that can occur a plurality of times within the business hours of the game hall. Further, in the case of a configuration in which error notification is not performed by the RTC effect (for example, a configuration in which the error notification is performed by the error display unit or the speaker unit 64, or a configuration in which the error notification is output to the hall computer), the RTC effect is set before the set time. There is no need to set a set time for error command output. Further, even if it does not occur periodically, for example, error command output is frequently performed from the opening time of the game hall until a predetermined time elapses, and then the frequency of command output is reduced. It may be a configuration in which an inflection is attached to.

(50) In the thirteenth embodiment, the RTC effect is delayed due to an error state, but the RTC effect may not be executed. However, from the viewpoint of not impairing the expectations of the player who is looking forward to the RTC production, a configuration that only delays is preferable.

(51) In the thirteenth embodiment, the timing of performing the RTC effect may be notified in advance. For example, the symbol display device 51 performs countdown notification from before the set time when the RTC effect is performed. By doing so, the player who is seated in the gaming machine can clearly understand that the RTC effect is not performed even when the RTC effect is set. In this case, the countdown notification time may also be delayed by the delay process. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the error state is set before the set time, and it is possible to substantially notify the error state without waiting for the set time of the RTC effect.

(52) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the output target of the staging process and the comparison process is not limited to the staging control device 82 and the hall computer, and other than the device (main control device 81) that executes the staging process. It may be a device. For example, a data display device installed in a game hall is also included.

(53) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, in calculating the passing rate and the V winning rate of each passing area 412 to 414, for example, not only the error rate with the set value but also the calculated passing rate and V. The error state setting method and the set error state may be different depending on the high winning rate. That is, for example, when the V winning rate for one passage of the left passage region 412 or the right passage region 413 where the rotating body 201 is distributed after passing is a high value such as 100%, a fraudulent act is clearly performed. If the passing rate of the back passing area 412 with respect to the accessory device 400 winning is as high as 100% for the back passing area 412 in which the V prize is always generated when passing, this is also the case. It may be determined that cheating is clearly being carried out. On the contrary, when the V winning rate for one pass of the back passing area 412 is not 100%, the ball is clearly clogged, and the passing rate of the left and right passing areas 421 and 413 for the accessory device 400 winning. When is 0%, it is considered that the act of forcibly guiding to the back passage area 414 is performed. Therefore, in such cases, if the configuration is such that the error rate is set without calculating the error rate, the processing configuration can be simplified, and if it is separately output and notified, it is clear. It is possible to take prompt action for various errors. However, for example, even if the passing rate of the back passage region 412 with respect to the bonus device 400 winning is 100%, the V winning as in the above embodiment is taken into consideration in consideration of the possibility of the bias caused by accident. It is necessary to devise a way to calculate the average value, such as a configuration in which the calculation is performed after the occurrence of 3 times.

(54) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the cycle for resetting each passing number counter and winning number counter is not limited to the above, and for example, the game time is measured by a timer counter or the like, and the timer is used. It may be configured to reset when the counter reaches a predetermined value.

(55) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passage of one game ball is detected a plurality of times in order to grasp the ball jam by using the detection results of the passage detection sensors 402 to 404. Although it is configured, it is sufficient if it is possible to grasp the jamming of the ball. For example, a motion sensor may be applied so that it is possible to detect that one game ball is stationary / flowing down. good.

(56) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the passage detection sensors 402 to 404 are provided in the passage regions 412 to 414, respectively, but the passage detection sensors may not be provided in any one of the passage regions. good. Since the game ball that has entered the bonus device 400 passes through any of the passing areas 412 to 414, the game ball that has entered the bonus device 400 (the game ball detected by the entrance sensor 179) This is because if it is not detected in a passing area other than the passing area where the passing detection sensor is not provided, it can be determined that the sensor has been distributed to the passing area where the passing detection sensor is not provided.

(57) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, it is clear when V winning occurs even though there is no passing information for each passing area 412 to 414 (each passing number counter is 0). Although a V error is set as an illegality or abnormality, it can be judged as an obvious illegality or abnormality in other cases. That is, when the number of V prizes (V prize number counter) is larger than the total number of passes in each passing area 412 to 414, or when the number of winnings to the bonus device 400 (feature winning number counter) is in each passing area 412. If it is different from the total number of passages of ~ 414, or the number of winnings to the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39 (first winning number counter, second winning number counter), each passing area 412 to 414 passes. This is the case when the total number is large. In these cases as well, it may be configured to perform the same processing as the V error as an obvious fraud or abnormality.

(58) In the 12th to 14th embodiments, one passage detection sensor 402 to 404 is provided in each passage region 412 to 414, but passage detection is performed in any or any of the passage regions 412 to 414. A plurality of sensors may be provided. In particular, in the passing region where distribution by the first distribution member 300 occurs, such as the left passage region 412, the distribution by the first distribution member 300 is normal by specifying the passage information before and after the distribution. It is possible to identify whether it is being carried out as it is.

(59) In the twelfth to fourteenth embodiments, the game ball that has passed through any of the passing areas 412 to 414 is configured to win a V prize, but at least one passing area of each passing area 412 to 414 is used. The game ball that has passed may be configured to win a V prize, and may be configured to be able to pass through the passing areas 412 to 414 in an overlapping manner.

(60) A pachinko machine of another type different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The following feature groups are "known as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which is provided with a variable ball entry device provided in a gaming area (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, for example, a gaming area. When the gaming ball passes through the operating port provided in the above, the gaming state shifts to the specific control state. In this case, the variable ball entry device is opened for a predetermined period and the variable ball entry device is entered. It is possible to enter a game ball. Then, as a specific event (predetermined event), for example, the game ball enters the variable ball entry device and the game ball is provided in the variable ball entry device, which is advantageous. Regarding the background technique that "the variable ball entry device or other variable ball entry device is continuously opened and closed in a predetermined manner based on the ball entering the mouth", "here. Therefore, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game in the gaming machine, and for example, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, it is desired to devise such as diversifying the manner of entering the ball into the V winning opening and the like. " It was made with the problem that the invention is trying to solve.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means (combination) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Physical device 150) and
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (entry into the operating ports 38, 39 or start of a round game). (A function to execute the opening / closing process by the main control device 81 and a function to execute the game control process) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A function of executing a privilege granting means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. And the function to execute the winning process),
The first aspect in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distribution state. If there is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second aspect (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If so, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means is
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing pattern A, special opening A result or special opening B result, and the second opening timing table is selected. The number of pending information is more than a predetermined number, the result of grasping the operating status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the open / close execution mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number. Based on the fact that the change lottery by the change lottery process was won, that V prizes can be won on the normal route even after the provisional change, and other conditions that make it easy for V prizes to occur), at the first timing First switching execution means for executing the state switching control (a function for executing processing for opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round by the main control device 81 and the setting processing for each opening, control start processing, and control processing). Based on the function of executing the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the function of executing the processing of setting the opening / closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the number of pending information being more than a predetermined number. Function to execute the process of setting the open / close timing, the function to execute the process of setting the open / close timing based on the operating status and the game state of the distribution members 300, 310, the first open / close timing change process or the second open / close timing change. A function to execute open / close control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V prizes are likely to occur, such as a function to execute processing), and
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing patterns B and C, normal opening result, and the first opening timing table is selected. , The number of reserved information is less than the predetermined number, the result of grasping the operating status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, and the number of game times from the open / close execution mode exceeds the predetermined number. Conditions such as not winning the change lottery by the change lottery process, not being able to win the V prize on the normal route after the provisional change, and being able to win the V prize only on the normal route were established. Based on this), the second switching execution means (setting process for each round by the main control device 81, setting process for each opening) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing is opened / closed. Function to execute processing for patterns B and C Function to execute processing for normal opening result in control start processing and processing under control, function to execute processing to set open / close timing based on the first opening timing table, hold A function to execute a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on the number of information being less than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on the operating status and the gaming state of the distribution members 300 and 310, A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute an opening / closing control of an opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is unlikely to occur, such as a function to execute a process of adopting a temporarily set opening / closing timing as it is.

According to the above configuration, the variable receiving means can receive the game ball to the variable receiving means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. , The sorting means is provided, and switching of an mode in which it is easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control that influences the acceptance to the variable receiving means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is different from the first condition. When the two conditions are satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

In particular, even though the game ball is received by the variable receiving means, an event occurs (occurs frequently) in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the sorting means, which is difficult for the player. Not only is the interest in the game diminished due to the inability to obtain benefits, but it may also give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, as described above, regarding the distribution timing on the distribution means side, by changing the state switching timing without changing it, the acceptance timing to the variable receiving means is changed, and then the first passage portion. By configuring the structure to change the passage rate to the side, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature A2. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (accessory device 150) and
A variable ball entry that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the actuation ports 38, 39 or start of a round game). Control means (a function to execute opening / closing processing by the main control device 81 and a function to execute game control processing) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (outway passage 191b) through which the game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass,
A function of executing a privilege granting means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. And the function to execute the winning process),
The first aspect (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side, and the second distribution member 310 If it is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second mode (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state and it is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
The variable ball entry control means
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing pattern A, special opening A result or special opening B result, and the second opening timing table is selected. The number of pending information is more than a predetermined number, the result of grasping the operating status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the open / close execution mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number. The first timing is based on the fact that the change lottery by the change lottery process was won and the conditions that the V prize is likely to occur, such as the fact that the V prize can be won by the normal route even after the provisional change, are satisfied). The first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (the function of executing the processing for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round by the main control device 81 and the setting processing for each opening, and the main control device 81. The function to execute the process for the special open A result and the special open B result in the control start process and the process under control, the function to execute the process to set the open / close timing based on the second open timing table, and the number of pending information. A function to execute a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on a predetermined number or more, a function of executing a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on the operating status and a game state of the distribution members 300, 310, and the first (1) A function to execute opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that a V prize is likely to occur, such as a function to execute an opening / closing timing change process or a second opening / closing timing change process).
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing patterns B and C, a normal opening result, and a first opening timing table is selected. That, the number of reserved information is less than the predetermined number, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 was not the predetermined result, and the number of game times from the open / close execution mode is the predetermined number of times. V prizes occur, such as exceeding the above, not winning the change lottery by the change lottery process, not being able to win V prizes on the normal route after the provisional change, and being able to win V prizes only on the normal route originally. A second switching execution means (setting process for each round by the main control device 81, for each opening) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing based on the fact that a difficult condition is satisfied). Based on the function to execute the processing for opening / closing patterns B and C in the setting processing of, the function to execute the processing for the normal opening result in the control start processing and the processing under control by the main control device 81, and the first opening timing table. A function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing, a function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing based on the number of reserved information being less than a predetermined number, an operation status of the distribution members 300, 310, and a game. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 is executed so that the V prize is unlikely to occur, such as the function of executing the process of setting the opening / closing timing based on the state and the function of executing the processing of adopting the temporarily set opening / closing timing as it is. Function) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the variable ball entry is provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching of an mode in which it is easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control that influences the entry into the variable ball entry means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

In particular, even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, an event occurs (occurs frequently) in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the distribution means, which is quite difficult for the player. Not only is the interest in the game diminished due to the inability to obtain benefits, but it may also give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, as for the distribution timing on the distribution means side as described above, the timing of entering the variable ball entry means is different by changing the state switching timing without changing it, and then the first step thereafter. By configuring the structure to change the passing rate to the passing portion side, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature A3. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (accessory device 150) and
Variable entry control means (open / close processing by the main control device 81) that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game). Function to execute) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (outway passage 191b) through which the game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass,
A privilege granting means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion.
The first aspect (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side, and the second distribution member 310 If it is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second mode (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state and it is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (determined to be the continuation rate fluctuation mode in the process of step S1204 by the main control device 81), the predetermined state switching control of the variable ball entry means is performed a plurality of times. A game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state that can be executed a number of times (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode), and
Equipped with
The specific state is configured to perform the next state switching control based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion in one of the state switching controls.
The variable ball entry control means
A first switching execution means (mainly) that executes the state switching control at the first timing in the specific state based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (the opening / closing pattern A) when the predetermined event occurs. A function to execute the processing for the opening / closing pattern A in the setting processing for each round and the setting processing for each opening by the control device 81), and
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first timing is satisfied in the specific state based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening / closing patterns B and C). A second switching execution means (a function of executing processing for opening / closing patterns B and C in the setting processing for each round by the main control device 81 and the setting processing for each opening) that executes the state switching control at the timing.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the variable ball entry is provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching of an mode in which it is easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control that influences the entry into the variable ball entry means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

Further, the above configuration is such that when the game ball passes through the first passing unit during one state switching control in the specific state, the next state switching control is performed, and in this specific state, the first passing unit is performed. The player is very interested in whether or not the game ball passes through.

In particular, even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, an event occurs (occurs frequently) in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the distribution means, which is quite difficult for the player. Not only does the interest in the game decrease without the next state switching control being performed, but it may also give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, and the state switching timing is different, so that the entry timing to the variable entry means is different, and then the first passage is performed. By adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the portion side is changed, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature A4. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable that is provided in the game area and can be switched between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state. Ball entry means (accessory device 150) and
A variable ball entry control means (main control) that executes a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the actuation ports 38 and 39). (Function to execute game control processing by the device 81) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (outway passage 191b) through which the game ball entered into the variable entry means can pass,
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a winning process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (generation of an opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion.
The first aspect (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side, and the second distribution member 310 If it is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second mode (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state and it is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If it is 310, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (it is determined that the result is not a deviation result or a direct hit result in the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81), the state switching control of the variable ball entry means can be executed a predetermined number of times. Execution of the game state transition means (game control process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to a specific state (a state in which the process being controlled is performed based on the normal open result, the special open A result, or the special open B result). Function to do) and
Equipped with
The variable ball entry control means
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, and the number of pending information is a predetermined number. That is the above, that the result of grasping the operating status of the distribution members 300 and 310 was a predetermined result, that the number of game times from the open / close execution mode was less than the predetermined number, and that the change was made by the lottery process. Based on the fact that the lottery was won, the condition that V prize is likely to occur, such as the fact that V prize can be won by the normal route even after the provisional change is satisfied), the above is said at the first timing in the specific state. Based on the first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (the function of executing the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the control start processing and the processing during control by the main control device 81, and the second opening timing table. A function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing, a function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing based on the number of reserved information being more than a predetermined number, an operation status of the distribution members 300, 310, and a game. Opening / closing control of opening / closing accessory 168 such as a function to execute a process of setting an opening / closing timing based on a state, a function of executing a first opening / closing timing change process or a second opening / closing timing change process, etc. Function to execute) and
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (normal opening result, the first opening timing table is selected, and the number of pending information is predetermined. The number is less than the number, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not the predetermined result, the number of game times from the open / close execution mode exceeds the predetermined number, and the change is made by the lottery process. Based on the fact that the lottery was not won, that V winning is not possible on the normal route after the provisional change, and that V winning is originally possible only on the normal route, and other conditions that make it difficult for V winning to occur) The second switching execution means (main control device 81) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the start timing of the specific state different from the case of the first switching execution means. The function to execute the process for the normal release result in the control start process and the process under control by, the function to execute the process to set the open / close timing based on the first open timing table, and the number of pending information is less than the predetermined number. A function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing based on a certain condition, a function to execute a process of setting an open / close timing based on the operating status and a game state of the distribution members 300 and 310, and a temporarily set open / close timing. A function to execute the opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that V prizes are unlikely to occur, such as a function to execute the process to be adopted as it is) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the variable ball entry is provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a sorting means, and switching of an mode in which it is easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control that influences the entry into the variable ball entry means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When a different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at a second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

In particular, even though the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, an event occurs (occurs frequently) in which the game ball does not pass through the first passing portion side by the distribution means, which is quite difficult for the player. Not only is the interest in the game diminished without the benefits being granted, but it can also give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, and the state switching timing is different, so that the entry timing to the variable entry means is different, and then the first passage is performed. It is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience by adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the portion side is changed.

Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it becomes a specific state in which the ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means. According to the above configuration, the timing of the state switching control can be made different without changing the start timing of the specific state. As a result, not only the ball entry rate to the variable ball entry means varies in the specific state, but also if the timing of the state switching control is set in relation to the switching timing of the mode of the distribution means, the timing of the state switching control can be set in the specific state. It is possible to make the passage rate to the first passage portion different while making it difficult to aim at the passage of the game ball to the first passage portion.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore, a privilege based on the passing thereof. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player is very interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of feature A3, the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion in a specific state is a condition for shifting to the next state switching control, so that the first condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that it is easy to shift to the next state switching control, and conversely, when the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to shift to the next state switching control. Therefore, it is possible to change not only which condition is satisfied in each state switching control but also the continuation rate of the state switching control, and it is possible to make a novel game.

In addition, if this configuration is applied to the configuration of feature A4, the passing rate to the first passing portion can be changed without changing the start timing of the specific state, so that it is a privilege while suppressing actions such as aiming. The grant rate (passing rate to the first passing portion) can be changed, and the game can be a novel game.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means (combination) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Physical device 150) and
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means (execution of opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means. Function to do) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A function of executing a privilege granting means (a function of executing an opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. )When,
The first aspect in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distribution state. If there is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second aspect (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If so, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), And a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) that can shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed.
Equipped with
In the special gaming state, in one of the specific controls, the next specific control can be performed based on the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion.
The variable acceptance control means is
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that easily generates the V prize such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). The timing at which V distribution by the main control device 81 is likely to be performed, such as the first switching execution means to be executed (setting process for each round by the main control device 81, processing for opening / closing pattern A in each opening setting process, etc.). (Function to execute the process for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168) and
During the specific control, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, such as opening / closing patterns B and C, is satisfied). For the opening / closing patterns B and C in the second switching execution means (setting process for each round by the main control device 81 and setting process for each opening) that executes the state switching control at the second timing different from the first timing. A function to execute processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed, such as processing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a privilege is given when a game ball received in a situation where it is possible to receive the game ball to the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means is provided with the variable receiving means. The distribution means is provided, and switching of an mode in which it is easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times is shifted to a special gaming state in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times. This special gaming state has a configuration in which the next specific control can be performed based on passing through the first passing portion in one specific control, and therefore, only the number of received pieces to the variable receiving means is required. Instead, the player is interested in whether or not the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion.

In such a configuration, during one specific control, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the first timing, and when the second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing. In the variable receiving means, the sorting mode on the sorting means side is a predetermined timing, and the sorting mode does not change. Therefore, the timing of the state switching control on the variable receiving means side should be changed as described above. Therefore, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

As a result of the above, the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state can be designed without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching executing means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore, based on the passing. It is easy to move to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is very interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B3. The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein in the special gaming state, the switching timing of the sorting means is set as a predetermined timing from the start of one of the specific controls. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the distribution means, the switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect is fixed from the start of one specific control, while the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. The acceptance timing to the variable receiving means differs depending on whether or not the method is used, and therefore the passing rate to the first passing portion changes. Thereby, the continuation rate of the specific control can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution means.

Feature B4. Features B1 to feature B1 to include a means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each of the specific controls of the special gaming state at the time of transition to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control in the special gaming state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied depends on the special gaming state. Since it is set at the time of transition, for example, at the start of the special gaming state (at the time of transition), the notification regarding the continuation rate (notification of the special gaming state with a high continuation rate or the specific state with a low continuation rate) is required. It is possible to execute (notification, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to which condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, "at the time of transition to the special gaming state" can also be rephrased as "based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied".

Feature B5. Features B1 to B4 provided with means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each of the specific controls of the special gaming state at the start of the specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control in the special gaming state changes depending on whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied is in the special gaming state. Since it is set at the start of the specific control, it is possible to always pay attention to which condition is satisfied (whether the continuation rate is high or low) in each specific control.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a plurality of the sorting means are provided on the flow path of one gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, the passing rate to the first passing portion thereafter changes depending on the combination of the first aspect and the second aspect in each distribution means. Then, since the execution timing of the state switching control is set to be different depending on which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the passing rate of the first passing portion can be set more variously. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "a game ball received by the variable receiving means is sent to either the first passing portion side or the second passing portion side by being provided separately from the sorting means and performing a periodic operation. If a "periodic operation means (rotating body 201) that can be derived" is provided, each distribution means that switches between the first aspect and the second aspect at a predetermined timing and the periodic operation are performed. It is possible to clarify the distinction between the periodic operation means and the so-called periodic operation means.

Feature B7. As the plurality of distribution means provided, the first distribution means (first distribution member 300, rotating body 201) that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine and the first visibility from the front of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein a second distribution means (second distribution member 310), which is lower than the distribution means, is provided.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific control continues when the game ball passes through the first passing portion in the special gaming state, if the sorting means for distributing the passing rate to the first passing portion can be visually recognized, the distribution is performed. It is preferable from the viewpoint that the game can be enjoyed by watching how the minutes are played and the degree of attention to the game is increased. On the other hand, if the sorting means is visible, there is a possibility that an act aimed at the sorting of the sorting means may be performed, and there may be a problem that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent acts. Therefore, by providing a plurality of sorting means and providing a difference in visibility between them, it is possible to solve conflicting problems caused by the high and low visibility.

Feature B8. It is characterized in that the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion when the second distribution means is the first aspect than when the first distribution means is the first aspect. Features The gaming machine described in B7.

According to the above configuration, it is more likely that the distribution by the second distribution means on the lower visibility side will pass through the first passage portion, so that the aiming is more preferably suppressed. be able to. As mentioned above, even if it is a conflicting issue due to the high and low visibility, if cheating is performed, it is disadvantageous not only to the game hall and the game machine maker but also to other players who play legitimate games. May give. Therefore, anti-fraud measures are considered to be the highest priority.

Feature B9. When the gaming ball received by the variable receiving means reaches the sorting means, even if the sorting means is the second aspect, the gaming ball can be subsequently led out to the first passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to leave the possibility of passing through the first passing portion regardless of whether the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed by either the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means. By doing so, while the continuation rate of the specific control is changed depending on the timing of the state switching control, the continuation rate is not determined by itself, and if the state switching control is performed in which the continuation rate becomes low. Even so, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being extremely reduced.

Feature B10. In the special gaming state, when the gaming ball passes through the first passing portion during one specific control, the configuration shifts to the next specific control even if the specific control period remains. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls accepted by the variable receiving means in the specific control differs depending on the timing of passing through the first passing portion during the specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is highly interested in when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, the "period in which the specific control is performed" can be rephrased as "the number of state switching controls in the specific control" in more detail.

Feature B11. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
1. The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein in the specific control, the first condition is set so as to be easily satisfied at a timing later than the second condition.

According to the above configuration, in the period in which one specific control is performed, it becomes easier to control the game ball so that the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion side toward the rear side. By doing so, the number of game balls accepted by the variable receiving means during one specific control increases, and the period of interest in whether or not the game balls pass through the first passing portion becomes long. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B12. The feature B1 is characterized in that the period during which the state switching control is performed during the specific control is set to the same period regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of B11.

According to the above configuration, while changing the passing rate of the first passing portion, that is, the continuation rate of the specific control, the period required for each state switching control in the specific control is the same period, so that the fairness of the game is guaranteed. Will be done. This is because if the period required for each state switching control is also different, not only the continuation rate of the specific control but also the number of game balls accepted by the variable receiving means will be different.

Feature B13. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
A setting means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each specific control of the special gaming state at the start of the specific control is provided.
The setting means is characterized in that it is possible to make it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than for the second condition in the state switching control for the first predetermined number of times in each specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B12.

According to the above configuration, in the first predetermined number of specific controls, the first condition is easily satisfied, so that the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate of the first predetermined number of specific controls is high. Therefore, in the first predetermined number of specific controls, it is possible to entertain the special gaming state with an elegant feeling, assuming that the specific control continues. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature B14. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
A setting means for setting whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in each specific control of the special gaming state at the start of the specific control is provided.
The setting means is characterized in that it is possible to make it easier for the second condition to be satisfied than the first condition in the second predetermined number of times of the specific control in each specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

According to the above configuration, in the second predetermined number of specific controls, the second condition is likely to be satisfied, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate of the second predetermined number of specific controls is low. Therefore, in the second predetermined number of specific controls, attention is paid to the whereabouts of the game ball regarding whether or not the specific control continues, that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the special game is performed. It is possible to add inflection to the degree of attention during the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In relation to the feature B13, the "second predetermined number of times" may be expressed as "the second predetermined number of times different from the first predetermined number of times".

Feature B15. The feature B14 is characterized in that the setting means can make it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than the second condition in the specific control following the second predetermined number of times. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation rate is low for the second predetermined number of times, the continuation rate is set to be high in the next specific control. Whether or not it is an important factor, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control of the second predetermined number of times.

Feature B16. The special gaming state transferred by the gaming state transition means includes a first special gaming state (16R continuation mode) in which the first condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second condition, and the second condition rather than the first condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, characterized in that a second special gaming state (continuous fluctuation mode) in which conditions are easily satisfied is provided.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the specific control in the special gaming state differs depending on which of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to attract attention to the type of special gaming state, and to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B17. The game state transition means has a configuration capable of shifting to the special gaming state based on the fact that the game ball received by the variable receiving means has passed through the first passing portion.
A predetermined notification means (symbol display device) as to whether to shift to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state from passing through the first passing portion to at least shifting to the special gaming state. 51) is provided with a notification control means (a function of the effect control device 82 to execute an effect for the open / close execution mode based on a control end command from the main control device 81) that can be notified by the effect control device 82.
The gaming machine according to feature B16, wherein the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable receiving means.

According to the above configuration, before the transition to the special gaming state, the player pays attention to whether or not the accepted gaming ball is accepted by the variable receiving means and whether or not the accepted gaming ball passes through the first passing portion. After that, pay attention to which special game state to shift to. Since the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable receiving means, even if the target of the player's attention is different, each notification is naturally performed within the range that can be seen. , It is possible to prevent the player's interests from being dispersed.

In addition, "the predetermined notification means is in the vicinity of the variable receiving means" means, for example,
"The variable receiving means and the predetermined notification means are provided in the effect unit having each of them, and the effect unit is installed in the game area where the game ball flows down."
"A fixed unit for fixing the variable receiving means and the predetermined notification means to the game board is provided, and in the fixed unit, the predetermined notification means is fixed to a surrounding portion covering the variable receiving means. It is also possible to express it as a composition or the like.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Accessory device 150) and
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means, and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A game state transition process (mainly) capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. A function to execute the game state transition process by the control device 81) and
The first aspect in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distribution state. If there is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second aspect (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If so, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
The state switching of the variable receiving means based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied (the ball has entered the operating ports 38 and 39, the opening waiting time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.). A function to execute a game control process by a game state transition means (main control device 81) that can shift the control to a specific state (a state in which a process being controlled is performed based on a normal opening result or the like) that can be executed a predetermined number of times. )When,
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means is
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that easily generates a V prize such as a special opening result is satisfied), and the state is described at the first timing. A first switching execution means for executing switching control (a function of executing an opening / closing control process of the opening / closing accessory 168 at a timing at which V distribution is likely to occur) and
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined condition is based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the condition that it is difficult to generate a V prize such as a normal opening result is satisfied). A second switching execution means (difficult to generate V distribution) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the condition satisfaction timing different from the case of the first switching execution means. (Function to execute the processing of opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 at the timing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means is provided with the sorting means in the configuration of shifting to the special gaming state. Therefore, switching in a mode that makes it easy / difficult to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and in that case, when the first condition is satisfied, the variable receiving means is received at the first timing. When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing (passing rate) to the first passing portion side different without changing the sorting mode on the sorting means side.

In particular, it is quite special for the player that an event occurs (occurs frequently) in which the game ball does not pass through the first passage portion side by the distribution means even though the game ball is received by the variable receiving means. Not only does the interest in the game decrease without shifting to the game state, but it may also give the player a sense of unfairness. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, and the state switching timing is different, so that the acceptance timing to the variable receiving means is different, and then the first passing portion side. By configuring the structure to change the passage rate to, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first aspect and the second aspect in the distribution means, "predetermined timing" may be rephrased as "timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a specific event". good.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore, a privilege based on the passing thereof. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player is very interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

In particular, in feature C1, since the passing rate to the first passing portion can be changed without changing the timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied, the transition rate to the special gaming state (the first) while suppressing actions such as aiming. 1) The passing rate to the passing portion) can be changed, and the game can be a novel game.

Feature C3. The distribution means is characterized in that the switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Or the gaming machine according to the feature C2.

According to the above configuration, the distribution means switches between the first aspect and the second aspect at a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness in the game, as compared with the configuration in which the distribution means is switched at random timing. On the other hand, as described in the feature C1, the timing of the state switching control in the specific state is different between the first switching executing means and the second switching executing means. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to make the passing rate to the first passing portion different by performing the state switching control by each switching executing means.

Feature C4. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means execute the state switching control between the first timing and the second timing without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which is characterized in that the timing can be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the passing rate to the first passing portion different without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in one specific state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels unfair due to the increase or decrease in the number of state switching controls.

Feature C5. The first switching executing means and the second switching executing means have the first timing and the second timing without different lengths of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in one specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the execution timing of the state switching control can be different from that of the timing.

According to the above configuration, since the variable receiving means is in the first state and the length of the period during which the game ball can be received is the same, the variable receiving means is used regardless of which switching executing means performs the state switching control. The acceptance rate (ball entry rate) itself does not change. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be further ensured.

It should be noted that the configuration is provided with "means (payout device 96) for giving a privilege (a prize ball based on a prize to the bonus device 150) to the player based on the fact that the game ball is received by the variable receiving means". Then, the fairness can be further enhanced by the fact that the acceptance rate to the variable acceptance means does not change. By the way, from the viewpoint of the gameability of how to pass the game ball to the first passing part, the privilege given based on the fact that the game ball is received by the above-mentioned variable receiving means is to play the game through the first passing part. It is preferable that the privilege is different from the privilege given based on the passage of the ball (transition to the special gaming state).

Feature C6. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the state switching control on the rear side is easier to perform the state switching control by the first switching executing means than the state switching control on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in a specific state, the state switching control on the rear side has a higher passing rate to the first passing portion than the state switching control on the front side. As a result, it becomes possible to entertain the specific state to the end, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C7. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
In one of the state switching controls in the specific state, the state switching control between the long-term mode and the short-term mode is performed so that the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is relatively long and short. It has been set and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first switching executing means has a configuration in which the state switching control, which is the long-term aspect, can be easily selected.

According to the above configuration, since the passing rate to the first passing portion is increased in the state switching control which is a long-term mode, the acceptance rate to the variable receiving means and the passing rate to the first passing portion are linked. Therefore, the points to be noted by the player are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C8. The launching means launches a game ball in a predetermined firing cycle (0.6 sec).
The first switching executing means and the second switching executing means have the first timing and the second timing without different lengths of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state in one specific state. The configuration is such that the execution timing of the state switching control can be different from that of the timing.
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, in the state switching control which is the short-term mode, the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is shorter than the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature C7, which is characterized by being set.

According to the above configuration, the acceptance of the game ball cannot be expected in the state switching control in the short-term mode, but the acceptance of the game ball can be expected to the maximum in the state switching control in the long-term mode. Therefore, the timing that the player should pay attention to becomes clearer, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C9. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.
The specific state ends earlier when the first switching execution means performs the state switching control and when the second switching execution means performs the state switching control. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, which is characterized in that it can be set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching executing means that increases the passing rate to the first passing portion, the specific state ends earlier, so that, for example, the next specific state is reserved. In that case, it is possible to shift to the next specific state at an early stage, and when the passage to the first passing portion occurs, it is possible to shift to the special gaming state at an early stage after the end of the specific state. Therefore, the smooth progress of the game is realized, and even if the passage to the first passage does not occur, the player can change his / her mind at an early stage without giving the player time to be discouraged. Can be urged.

Feature C10. In the sorting means, the switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The predetermined condition is any one of the features C1 to C9, which is satisfied as the state switching control in which the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing after the variable receiving means starts switching from the second state to the first state. By doing so, the operation start timing of the variable receiving means and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

Feature C11. In the sorting means, the switching timing between the first aspect and the second aspect is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the game area, a ball entry portion (operating openings 38, 39) into which a game ball can enter is provided.
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of a ball entering the ball entry portion or the entry information based on the entry into the ball entry portion being a predetermined determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C9.

According to the above configuration, the specific state is started based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, or the specific state is started based on the entry information based on the entry to the predetermined determination target. Will be done. Then, the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing from the start of this specific state. By doing so, the timing at which the ball entering the ball entering portion or the ball entering information becomes the determination target and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further ensured.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means (combination) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Physical device 150) and
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means (execution of opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means. Function to do) and
A specific passage portion (V winning passage 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass, and
Based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), And a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) that can shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed.
Equipped with
In the special gaming state, the continuation condition is that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion in one of the specific controls, and the next specific control can be performed based on the satisfaction of the continuation condition. It is a composition that becomes
The specific control is set to a high continuation specific control in which the ease of satisfying the continuation condition is relatively high or low, and a low continuation specific control.
As the period in which each of the state switching controls of the specific control is performed, the first predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at the first timing assuming that the control timing of the state switching control is different, and the first timing different from the first timing. A second predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at two timings is set.
Based on the fact that the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control in the special gaming state, the next specific control is set as the high continuation specific control, and the second predetermined period is described. Based on the fact that the continuation condition is satisfied, it is provided with a setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of setting the next specific control as the low continuation specific control. A featured gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the next specific control differs depending on whether the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period or the continuation condition is satisfied in the second predetermined period. As a result, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the timing at which the continuation condition is satisfied in the predetermined specific control. Then, such an effect can be realized only by changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased with a simple configuration.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first predetermined period is set to the rear side of the second predetermined period in the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period on the rear side in the specific control, the next specific control becomes a high continuation specific control, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, each specific control during the special gaming state can be enjoyed for a longer time, which is preferable for the player. Further, for example, in the specific control, it is possible to perform a game such as adjusting the acceptance timing of the game ball to the variable acceptance means so that the continuation condition is satisfied not during the second predetermined period but during the first predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game that adjusts the timing at which the continuation condition is satisfied during specific control.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, since the state switching control is performed at the timing when it is easier to pass through the specific passing portion during the first predetermined period on the rear side, the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied during the first predetermined period on the rear side. .. Therefore, for example, a novel game is realized in which the passage to the specific passage portion is not desired during the second predetermined period in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, and the passage to the specific passage portion is waited for the first predetermined period thereafter. be able to.

Feature D4. Regardless of whether it is the first predetermined period or the second predetermined period, the length of the period in which the first state is set is set so that the game ball can be accepted by the variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, since the game ball is received by the variable receiving means in the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period in the specific control, it is possible to make it meaningful to continue firing the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop striking that stops the launch of the game ball.

Feature D5. Any of the features D1 to D3, wherein the variable receiving means is set so that the length of the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is longer in the second predetermined period than in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied, it is meaningful to continue firing the game ball even in the second predetermined period in which the next specific control can be the low continuation specific control. For example, the number of specific controls is limited in the special gaming state, and the next continuation rate is irrelevant in the maximum number of specific controls. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to make the game desired with the intention of having the variable receiving means accept the game ball even in the second predetermined period.

Feature D6. The special gaming state is the special gaming state if the continuation condition is not satisfied when the number of times of the state switching control reaches a predetermined predetermined number of times (RC2 = 19) in one specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to satisfy the continuation condition before the number of state switching controls reaches a predetermined number of times. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the feature D2, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. .. Therefore, to enjoy the sense of balance between the end condition of the special gaming state (reaching a predetermined number of times without satisfying the continuation condition) and the attempt to establish the continuation condition during the first predetermined period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D7. The special gaming state is the special if the continuation condition is not satisfied when the number of machines received by the variable receiving means reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine) in the specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the gaming state is terminated.

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to satisfy the continuation condition before the number of received pieces to the variable receiving means reaches a predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set for the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the feature D2, it is considered that the continuation condition should be satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. .. Therefore, to enjoy the sense of balance between the end condition of the special gaming state (the number reaches a predetermined number without satisfying the continuation condition) and the attempt to establish the continuation condition during the first predetermined period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D8. The setting means is any of the features D1 to D7, wherein when the specific control this time is set to the high continuation specific control, the next specific control can also be easily set to the high continuation specific control. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control during the special gaming state, the high continuation specific control is likely to be set from the next time onward. Therefore, the degree of attention in the predetermined specific control will be further increased, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined specific control is the low continuation specific control.

According to the above configuration, even if the low continuation specific control is difficult to satisfy the continuation condition, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set to the high continuation specific control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention even during low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the next specific control of the predetermined specific control can also be set to the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, a predetermined specific control whose continuation condition differs depending on the establishment timing can be continued, so that each specific control in the special gaming state attracts a great deal of attention (do not overlook the establishment timing of the continuation condition). Can be).

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Accessory device 150) and
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means, and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A privilege granting means (for example, a game by the main control device 81) that grants a privilege (transition to open / close execution mode, establishment of round continuation condition) to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion. Function to execute state transition processing) and
The first aspect in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distribution state. If there is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second aspect (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If so, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
The control mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance control means includes
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes a first timing (timing at which V sorting can be performed) in which the sorting means can easily reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect. A first state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is easily performed) and
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes a second timing (timing at which V sorting is difficult to be performed) in which the sorting means is difficult to reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed) and
Is set,
When the variable acceptance control means executes the state switching control, the variable acceptance control means switches between the first state switching control mode and the second state switching control mode (for example, each of the switching means by the main control device 81). The control timing of the opening / closing accessory 168, such as the setting processing for the round, the setting processing for each opening / closing, and the processing during control, is controlled so as to be the opening / closing mode at the timing when V distribution is easy to be performed and the opening / closing mode at the timing when it is not. A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball accepted by the variable receiving means is distributed to the first passing portion side as a result of being distributed by the distribution means whose distribution destination is changed at a predetermined timing, the game is played. Benefits are given to the person. In such a configuration, the variable acceptance control means that controls the state switching of the variable acceptance means includes a first switching control mode capable of executing variable acceptance control including a first timing that easily passes through the first passage portion side. Since it is provided with a second variable acceptance control mode including a second timing that makes it difficult to pass through the first passing portion side and a switching means capable of performing switching, the distribution means side that operates at a predetermined timing It is possible to make the ease / difficulty of passing to the first passing portion (passing rate) different without changing the distribution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature E2. Even if the gaming ball is received by the variable receiving means at the first timing, the first timing is set so as to include a timing at which it is difficult to pass through the first passing portion. The gaming machine described in E1.

According to the above configuration, even if the sorting means accepts the variable receiving means at the first timing, it is not always distributed to the first passing portion side, so that it is safe even at the first timing. Without letting it diminish the interest in the destination of the accepted game ball. Therefore, the interest in the game can be suitably maintained.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the second timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball received by the variable receiving means can pass through the first passing portion.

According to the above configuration, even if the variable receiving means is accepted by the sorting means at the second timing, the possibility of passing through the first passing portion is left, the player is not discouraged, and the interest in the game is extreme. It is possible to suppress the decrease to.

Feature E4. The first state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control a plurality of times, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is performed by the distribution means in the one mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is set as the state switching control which is the first timing for easily reaching the distribution means in a certain situation.

According to the above configuration, for example, for at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, it is not the state switching control but another state switching control. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing that makes it easy to reach the first passing portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

Feature E5. Among the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control which is the first timing is performed before the state switching control which is the first timing. 1 The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that a state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control on the side other than the state switching control that is the first timing is performed first, and at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the first state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to raise interest in each state switching control mode and immerse yourself in the game.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the distribution means has a configuration capable of switching from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed to the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution means can be specified regardless of the first timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set according to the state switching control on the side different from the first timing, for example, regarding one state switching control, it is in accordance with the regulation of the gaming machine. By changing the state switching control other than the above (state switching control of the first timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E7. The second state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control a plurality of times, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is the first mode in which the distribution means is used. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, which is set as the state switching control which is the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in the situation.

According to the above configuration, for example, for at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, it is not the state switching control but another state switching control. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the second timing in which it is difficult to reach the first passing portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

If the configuration is applied to a gaming machine having the feature E4, both state switching control modes become a plurality of state switching controls, and it is possible to enhance the effect that it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode. ..

Feature E8. Among the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control which is the second timing is performed before the state switching control which is the second timing. 2. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control on the side other than the state switching control that is the second timing is performed first, and at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the second state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, it is possible to raise interest in each state switching control mode and immerse yourself in the game.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the distribution means has a configuration capable of switching from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed to the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution means can be specified regardless of the second timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set according to the state switching control on the side different from the second timing, for example, regarding the one state switching control, it is in accordance with the regulation of the gaming machine. By changing the state switching control other than the above (state switching control of the second timing), the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E10. The first state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control a plurality of times, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is performed by the distribution means in the one mode. It is set as the state switching control, which is the first timing for easily reaching the distribution means in a certain situation.
The second state switching control mode is configured by the state switching control a plurality of times, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of state switching controls is the first mode in which the distribution means is used. It is set as the state switching control, which is the second timing in which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in the above situation.
The state switching control that is different from the state switching control that is the first timing and the state switching control that is different from the state switching control that is the second timing are set to be executed at the same timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, for example, for at least one state switching control, even if there is a situation that must be executed at a predetermined timing, it is not the state switching control but another state switching control. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing where it is easy to reach the first passing portion side and the second timing where it is difficult to reach, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 is exhibited in consideration of the above situation. can do. Then, if the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is executed at the same timing, it is possible to enhance the effect that it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode.

Feature E11. Among the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control which is the first timing is performed before the state switching control which is the first timing. 1 state switching control mode is set,
Among the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control which is the second timing is performed before the state switching control which is the second timing. Two state switching control modes are set,
The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the distribution means has a configuration capable of switching from the timing at which the different state switching controls are performed to the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the switching timing of the distribution means according to the timing at which the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is performed. As in the above feature E10, it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode is used, and the state switching control on the different side is prior to the state switching control of the first timing or the second timing. Because it is done in, the effect of making it difficult to understand is also enhanced. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress an act of aiming as the first state switching control mode.

Feature E12. The variable acceptance control means performs a plurality of specific controls (round games) in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Execution of the game state transition means (game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed over times (for example, 16 times, RC1). Function to do)
The special gaming state is characterized in that, in one of the specific controls, the next specific control can be performed based on the passage of the game ball through the first passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the special gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E13. As the privilege, the privilege granting means is configured to be able to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The variable acceptance control means is said to be based on the fact that predetermined conditions are satisfied (the ball has entered the operating ports 38 and 39, the open waiting time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.). The gaming state transition means (based on the main control device 81) capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state (a state in which the processing during control is performed based on the normal opening result or the like) that can be executed a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that it has a function of executing a game control process).

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied particularly to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the normal gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be obtained.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81), and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a specific number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, and
A function of executing a migration determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially executing a migration determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined migration information. )When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area,
A specific passage part (V winning opening 182a) through which the game ball can pass, and
A first aspect (open state or distribution state) in which a game ball is easily derived to the specific passage portion provided on the upstream side of the specific passage portion, and a game ball is derived to the specific passage portion from the first aspect. Distribution means (opening / closing accessory 168, first distribution member 300, 310) that can be switched to the difficult second mode (closed state or non-distribution state),
Is provided,
A function of executing a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting the game state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific passing portion. )When,
A variable distribution control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for executing mode switching control between the first aspect and the second aspect of the distribution means, and
Equipped with
The variable distribution control means is
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the mode switching control is executed at the first timing based on the fact that the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is the first predetermined number. A first switching execution means (for example, a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81 when the common hold number CRN is 0) and
When the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number. A second switching execution means for executing the mode switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81 when the common hold number CRN is 3).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, special information is acquired based on the entry into the ball entry section, the special information is stored in the information storage means up to a specific number, and the stored special information is sequentially determined to be transferred. In the target gaming machine, a specific passing portion is provided in the game area, and a distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the specific passing portion, and the mode switching control of the distribution is performed at the time of transition determination. It is done at different timings depending on the number of special information stored. As a result, the number of stored special information can be associated with the passing rate to the specific passing portion. For example, if the number of stored special information is large, the mode switching control may be performed at the timing when the special information is easily passed to the specific passing portion. If the number of stored special information is small, the mode switching control is performed at the timing when it is easy to pass to the specific passing part, and the transition rate to the advantageous state is changed in relation to the number of stored devices. can do.

Here, for example, assuming that it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is transferred through a lottery based on numerical information as a configuration for changing the transition rate to the advantageous state in relation to the number of memories, the lottery probability. It is also possible to make different according to the number of memories. However, with such a configuration, the transition to an advantageous state is determined only by exchanging numerical information, which not only deviates from the original enjoyment of the gaming machine of enjoying the flow mode of the gaming ball, but also only the numerical information. It also increases the possibility of fraudulent acts that take advantage of the gameplay that progresses through the exchange of information. Therefore, in the configuration in which the game ball shifts to an advantageous state by passing through the specific passing portion as in the above configuration, the mode switching control of the distribution means on the upstream side of the specific passing portion is defined as the number of stored special information. By associating them, it is possible to entertain the flow mode of the game ball and also make it difficult for cheating. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be suitably increased.

Feature F2. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing.
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first predetermined number is set as a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the larger the number of special information stored in the information storage means, the more the mode switching control is executed at the timing when the specific passing portion is easily passed. As a result, it is possible to create a new game in which a large amount of special information is expected to be stored in the information storage means, and to improve the interest.

Feature F3. The feature F2 is characterized in that the gaming state is set to a predetermined state (open / close execution mode) in which the transition determination is not performed by the transition determination means even if the special information is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature F2, since the transition determination is not performed in the predetermined state, special information is easily accumulated. This makes it possible to create a game such as how to store special information in the predetermined state.

It should be noted that the predetermined state can also be expressed as a state in which "the information acquisition means acquires the special information, but the transition determination means does not perform the transition determination".

Features F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the predetermined state is the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific passing portion and shifts to the advantageous state, the transition determination for the special information is not performed, and as a result, the special information is likely to be accumulated during the advantageous state. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous state is satisfied and the end is performed and the transfer determination is made for the stored special information, the mode switching control is performed at the timing when the game ball easily passes through the specific passing portion as described above. .. As a result, the advantageous state will be a series of villas. In this way, the player does not realize the change in the transition probability to the advantageous state or the consecutive villas in the advantageous state by lottery using numerical information, but the player visually understands the game state and the mode switching control of the distribution means. By realizing it to the extent possible, it will be possible to create a new game in which the fairness of the game is guaranteed.

Feature F5. As the sorting means,
With the first distribution means (opening / closing accessory 168) in which the mode switching control is executed by the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means. ,
The second distribution means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, first) in which the mode switching control is executed at a predetermined timing regardless of the number of the special information stored in the information storage means. 2 distribution member 310) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the first distribution means whose mode switching control timing is different depending on the number of stored special information and the second distribution means which are not different are provided, and the side is not related to the number of special information. Since the first distribution means is provided, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness in the game.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the first distribution means is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path to the specific passage portion with respect to the second distribution means.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the mode switching control of the first distribution means on the upstream side of the second distribution means is performed differs depending on the number of special information, so that the timing is predetermined. As for the second distribution means for which the mode switching control is performed, it is possible to make the distribution rate to the specific passing portion different by the setting on the first distribution means side. Therefore, the effect of the feature F5 can be more preferably performed.

Feature F7. A predetermined receiving device (accessory device 150) capable of receiving a game ball is provided in the game area.
The specific passing portion is arranged at a position where a game ball received by the predetermined receiving device can pass.
The first sorting means is provided at a position where it is difficult to sort the game ball received in the predetermined receiving device, while the second sorting means is received in the predetermined receiving device. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, wherein the gaming ball is provided at a position where it can be distributed.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game ball received in the receiving device is distributed to the specific passing portion side by the second distribution means. For example, when the gaming ball received in the receiving device is distributed to a side different from the specific passing portion by the first distribution means, the player performs some operation on the gaming hall or the gaming machine side. Then, you may feel distrust. On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, the game ball received in the receiving device is distributed by the second distribution means that operates at a fixed timing without the involvement of the first distribution means. Because it is done, it is easy to feel a sense of fairness.

Feature F8. The first distribution means becomes a mode in which the game ball can be received in the predetermined receiving device by the first aspect, and the game ball is brought into the predetermined receiving device by the second aspect. The gaming machine according to feature F7, which is characterized in that it is difficult to accept.

According to the above configuration, the first distribution means and the second distribution means can be suitably arranged in relation to the predetermined receiving device. Further, even if the game ball is received by the predetermined receiving device, it is not always all passing through the specific passing portion because the distribution is performed by the second distribution means. Therefore, even if the timing of the mode switching control by the first distribution means is changed to make the acceptance rate to the predetermined receiving device different, it is difficult to directly understand that the passing rate of the specific passing portion changes. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel unfair in a configuration in which the passing rate of the specific passing portion is changed.

Features F9. The first switching execution means controls so that the period in which the state in which the first distribution means is the first aspect is maintained is the first period.
The second switching execution means is described in the feature F8, wherein the first distribution means is controlled so that the period in which the state of the first aspect is maintained is the first period. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, the acceptance rate to the predetermined receiving device regardless of whether the mode switching control is performed by the first switching executing means or the mode switching control is performed by the second switching executing means. Does not change. Therefore, it is difficult to give a feeling of unfairness in the game.

In addition, it is assumed that the configuration is provided with "a privilege granting means (payout device 96) capable of granting a privilege (prize ball) to a player based on the acceptance of the game ball to a predetermined receiving device". The effect that does not change the rate can be achieved more concretely.

Feature F10. The first timing is set to a timing at which the game ball is easier to pass through the specific passing portion than the second timing.
The first predetermined number is set as a number larger than the second predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first timing is set to be closer to the timing at which the transition determination is performed than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the larger the number of special information stored in the information storage means, the easier it is to pass through the specific passing portion, the larger the number of special information, the faster the mode switching control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a smooth and quick game while increasing the number of special information to make it easier to pass through the specific passing portion.

Features F11. The variable distribution control means can execute the mode switching control based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information corresponds to the transition information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F10, which is characterized by being

According to the above configuration, the special information acquired based on the entry into the ball entry section is the target of the transition determination, and the determination result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information. Based on this, the mode switching control of the distribution means by the variable distribution control means is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not it becomes easy to pass through the specific passing portion by this mode switching control. By applying the characteristic configuration of changing the mode switching control according to the number of stored special information of the above-mentioned feature F1 to such a gaming machine, the entry is performed in a game starting from entry into the entry portion. The rate of entry into the ball section itself will be given the highest priority, and it is possible to create novel playability while emphasizing the original enjoyment of the gaming machine, such as allowing a game ball to enter a predetermined entry section. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means (combination) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Physical device 150) and
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means (execution of opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means. Function to do) and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A first privilege granting means (opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a first privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening / closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. Function to execute) and
The first aspect in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, if the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, the second distribution member 310 is in a non-distribution state. If there is, it is in the distribution state) and in the second aspect (for example, if it is the first distribution member 300, it is in the distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is more difficult to distribute to the first passing portion side than in the first aspect). If so, it is in a non-distribution state), and a distribution means (distribution member 300, 310 or a rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing.
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, as the first privilege, it is possible to execute the specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2). A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode), and
In the special gaming state, in one of the specific controls, a grasping means for grasping that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion (a function of executing the processing of steps S1329 and S1330 by the main control device 81) and
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means is
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that easily generates the V prize such as the opening / closing pattern A is satisfied). The timing at which V distribution by the main control device 81 is likely to be performed, such as the first switching execution means to be executed (setting process for each round by the main control device 81, processing for opening / closing pattern A in each opening setting process, etc.). (Function to execute the function to execute the process for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168) and
During the specific control, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, such as opening / closing patterns B and C, is satisfied). For the opening / closing patterns B and C in the second switching execution means (setting process for each round by the main control device 81 and setting process for each opening) that executes the state switching control at the second timing different from the first timing. A function to execute processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed, such as processing),
Equipped with
The second privilege giving means (step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of giving the second privilege (each distribution table of FIG. 35, the display mode of FIG. 41B) according to the grasping result of the grasping means. The gaming machine is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step SB105 by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, when the game ball accepted by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion in the normal gaming state, it shifts to the special gaming state as the first privilege. In this special gaming state, the control timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means differs depending on whether the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means is used, and as a result, the passage to the first passing portion is performed. The rate will change. In this case, since the mode of the sorting means is switched at a predetermined timing, even if the passing rate to the first passing portion is different as described above, the player feels distrust or unfairness. It is possible to reduce.

Further, in the special gaming state, it is grasped by the grasping means that the player has passed the first passing portion, and the second privilege may be granted based on the grasping result. Therefore, it is considered that the player desires to pass the first passing portion during the special gaming state, that is, to be controlled by the first switching execution means so that the second privilege is given. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion side than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore, based on the passing. It is easy to move to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is very interested in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature G3. A high-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low, and a low-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode) are available. It has been set and
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode.
The feature G1 or feature G2 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means is configured to set either the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode based on the grasp result of the grasp means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is set to a high advantage mode or a low advantage mode according to the passing situation to the first passing portion during the special gaming state. As a player, of course, he / she wants to be set to an advantageous high-advantage mode, so naturally there is a great deal of interest in the passage situation to the first passage portion. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is increased.

Features G4. Described in feature G3, the second privilege granting means grants the second privilege based on the number of passages to the first passing portion or the passing timing as a grasping result by the grasping means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw more attention to the passing situation to the first passing portion.

Feature G5. As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of 2R continuation mode) in which the number of times the specific control can be continued is set as the first number of times (for example, two times) and the number of times larger than the first number of times. The second special gaming state (16R continuous mode or continuous fluctuation mode open / close execution mode) set as the second number of times (for example, 16 times) is set.
A function of executing the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81 to set whether to execute the specific control by the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means in each of the special gaming states. )
In the first special gaming state, the first switching execution means is easy to set in the specific control, and in the second special gaming state, the second switching execution means is easy to set in the specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

According to the above configuration, each special gaming state having a different number of continuous specific controls is set as the special gaming state, and in the first special gaming state where the number of continuous times is small, the passing rate to the first passing portion is high. 1 It is easy to set the switching execution means, and in the second special gaming state where the number of continuations is larger than that, it is easy to set the second switching execution means having a low passing rate to the first passing portion. Then, the passage to the first passing portion during the special gaming state is grasped by the grasping means, and the second privilege is given based on the result. By doing so, it is possible to relate the advantage / disadvantage relationship of the special gaming state to the granting of the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, and it is possible to diversify the game. Therefore, it is possible to use it for improving the interest.

Feature G6. A high-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low, and a low-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode) are available. It has been set and
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode.
The second privilege granting means is
As a result of grasping the grasping means, it is based on the first grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed through the first passing portion is less than the specified number of times or the passing timing is earlier than the specific passing timing. Set to the high advantage mode,
As a result of grasping the grasping means, the low is based on the second grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed through the first passing portion is equal to or greater than the specified number of times or the passing timing is after the specific passing timing. The gaming machine according to feature G5, which is characterized in that it is set to an advantageous mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the feature G5, since the number of specific controls is small in the first special gaming state, it is easy to pass to the first passing portion, but the number of passing times and the passing timing are the second special gaming. Can be faster than the state. Therefore, in such a case, if the configuration is set to the high-advantage mode, which is highly advantageous for the player, the advantage of the first special gaming state, which is easy to pass through the first passing portion, is further emphasized. Is possible. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the high-advantage mode or the low-advantage mode is set at the end of the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it is easy to set the high advantageous mode after the first special gaming state, and it is easy to set the low advantageous mode after the second special gaming state. In the first special gaming state, the passing rate of the first passing portion is higher than that in the second special gaming state, but the number of specific controls is smaller than that in the second special gaming state. Therefore, if the balance of the advantages of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is configured as described above, even the first special gaming state, which tends to give a disadvantageous feeling to the player, is advantageous thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the game.

Feature G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the high-advantage mode and the low-advantage mode are set so that the high-advantage mode is set so that the predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied.

According to the above configuration, after the first special gaming state, the predetermined condition is satisfied again and it becomes easy to shift to the special gaming state. By doing so, it is considered that the player is convinced to continue the game even in the first special game state in which the number of specific controls is small. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G9. When the state switching control is performed by the first switching executing means, the timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can easily reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect (1). The variable receiving means becomes the first state at the first timing including the timing at which V distribution can be performed).
When the state switching control is performed by the second switching executing means, the timing at which the gaming ball received by the variable receiving means is difficult to reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect (1). The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, wherein the variable receiving means is in the first state at the second timing including (timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed).

According to the above configuration, the difference in advantage between the high-advantage mode and the low-advantage mode is achieved by a simple configuration such that the timing of each state switching control by the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means is different (special gaming state). (Transition rate to) can be realized. Here, a configuration in which the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the special gaming state is changed (the probability of establishment of a predetermined condition is changed) is also conceivable. However, in this case, various inconveniences such as complicated processing configuration inside the gaming machine and deterioration of the player's understanding may occur. Therefore, if the transition rate of such a special gaming state is changed by a simple configuration in which the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means is changed and the timing of the distribution means is not changed as described above. , It is possible to diversify the game while avoiding the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature G10. A ball entry portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port by the main control device 81), and
A migration determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for executing a migration determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to predetermined migration information. ,
Based on the fact that the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means, the predetermined notification means starts the predetermined effect, and ends the predetermined effect as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. As one game, a notification control means (a function of executing the effect processing by the effect control device 82) for controlling the predetermined notification means, and
A period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting the effect period of the game times, and
Equipped with
The variable receiving means executes the state switching control based on the notification by the notification control means as a result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponding to the transition information as the predetermined event. And
The distribution means has a configuration in which switching to the first aspect is performed after a predetermined specific period has elapsed based on the fact that the special information is the target of the transition determination.
A high-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of pattern A, relief mode or special mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high or low, and a low-advantage mode (opening / closing pattern of patterns B and C, normal mode) are available. It has been set and
The second privilege is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode.
In the highly advantageous mode, the period setting means has a timing (V distribution) in which the gaming ball received by the variable receiving means can easily reach the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is the one aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G9, characterized in that the effect period can be set so as to be a timing that can be performed).

According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the entry into the ball entry portion, and if the result of the transition determination corresponds to the migration information, the variable acceptance means is in the first state after the game. In this case, in the high-advantage mode, the effect period of the game is set so that the distribution means can be easily distributed to the first passage portion when the distribution means is switched. Move to the special game state. In this way, even in the first special gaming state where the number of specific controls is small, it is configured to be a so-called continuous villa, and it is very simple, such as changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means. By realizing it with a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means (combination) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Physical device 150) and
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means (execution of opening / closing processing by the main control device 81) that executes the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means. Function to do) and
A specific passage portion (V winning passage 191a) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass, and
Based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ), And a game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) that can shift to a special game state (open / close execution mode of continuation rate fluctuation mode) that can be executed.
Equipped with
In the specific control, a high advantage control mode and a low advantage control mode in which the timing of the state switching control is different are set so that the advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
In the special gaming state, a setting means (execution of setting processing of each round by the main control device 81) for setting whether to execute the control mode of each specific control as the high advantage control mode or the low advantage control mode. Function) and
A switching means (a function of executing a setting process for each opening by the main control device 81) for generating a switch from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode in a predetermined specific control of the special gaming state.
In the predetermined specific control, a special notification executing means (a function of executing an opening correspondence process by the staging control device 82) for executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, during the special gaming state, the special notification is performed at a timing when the control mode of the variable receiving means is different. That is, the special notification is performed at the timing (predetermined specific control) of switching from the low advantage control mode having a low advantage to the player to the high advantage control mode having a high advantage as the control mode. In this way, the player will be delighted as the low-advantageous control mode is switched to the high-advantageous control mode at the time of transition to the special gaming state. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature H2. In the special gaming state, the continuation condition is that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion in one of the specific controls, and the next specific control can be performed based on the satisfaction of the continuation condition. It is a composition that becomes
The low advantage control mode and the high advantage control mode are different from each other in the mode of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, so that the establishment rate of the continuation condition is different, and the high or low of the advantage is set. The gaming machine according to the feature H1, which is characterized by being a slingshot machine.

According to the above configuration, the low advantageous control mode and the high advantageous control mode are realized by the high and low of the continuation rate of the specific control during the special gaming state, and the high and low of the continuation rate is the state switching control of the variable receiving means. It is realized by the aspect. In this way, while retaining the original enjoyment of the gaming machine, such as enjoying the operation mode of the gaming ball, such as whether or not the gaming ball is accepted by the variable receiving means and whether or not it passes through a specific passing portion. , The game is diversified so that it is expected to be specially notified by a predetermined notification means.

Feature H3. In the special gaming state, the switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode can occur in the predetermined specific control, and the switching occurs in the predetermined specific control. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the second special gaming state is set.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether the generated special gaming state is the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state, and further, it is cut into the first special gaming state (highly advantageous control mode). I expect it to be an alternative). As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control increases and the interest in the special notification also increases. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Features H4. In the first special gaming state, in the specific control prior to the predetermined specific control from the start of the first special gaming state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode.
In the second special gaming state, in the specific control prior to the predetermined specific control from the start of the second special gaming state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. The gaming machine according to the feature H3.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to distinguish which of the first and second special gaming states is from the control mode of the variable receiving means from the start of the special gaming state. Therefore, the expectation for the special notification at the time of a predetermined specific control is increased.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the special gaming state is set so that the probability that the second special gaming state is selected is higher than that of the first special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, even if the player shifts to the special gaming state, he / she thinks that it is in the second special gaming state and the degree of attention may decrease. By executing a special notification at such a timing and performing an effect of switching to a highly advantageous control mode (actually, it was the first special gaming state), it is possible to suitably realize the surprise and joy of the player. It will be possible.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching means is performed at a specific number of times (RC2 = 11) of each state switching control in the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode occurs in the middle of the specific control (the specific number of times of the state switching control performed a plurality of times). By doing so, it is possible to expect that the above switching will occur for each specific control performed a plurality of times in the special gaming state, and it is possible to raise the interest in each specific control. ..

Feature H7. The specific control includes a first specific control (pattern F) in which switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode can occur, and a second specific control (pattern C) in which the switching does not occur. The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized in that, is set.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether each specific control of the special gaming state is the first specific control or the second specific control, and further, it is switched to the first specific control (highly advantageous control mode). I expect it to be. As a result, it is considered that the degree of attention to the predetermined specific control increases and the interest in the special notification also increases. As a result, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H8. In the first specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control prior to the state switching control at the specific number of times from the start of the first specific control.
The second specific control is described in the feature H7, wherein each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control at the specific number of times from the start of the second specific control. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to distinguish which of the first and second specific controls is from the control mode of the variable receiving means from the start of each specific control in the special gaming state. Therefore, the expectation for the special notification of the specific number of times is increased.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
The first swing that can be switched at a predetermined timing between the first mode of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area in the first direction and the second mode of distributing the game ball in a second direction different from the first direction. Distribution means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310) and
A second distribution means (opening / closing accessory) that can be switched between a third aspect of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area in a third direction and a fourth aspect of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area in a fourth direction different from the third direction. 168) and
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the grasping means (processing of step S2105 by the main control device 81) for grasping which of the first aspect and the second aspect the first distribution means is. Function to execute) and
The processing of the setting means (processes of steps S2107 to S2114 by the main control device 81) for setting the switching mode between the third aspect and the fourth aspect of the second distribution means based on the grasping result by the grasping means. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the first distribution means is switched between the first aspect and the second aspect at a predetermined timing, and the second distribution means depends on the aspect of the first distribution means. The switching mode is set. That is, the first distribution means that performs a constant operation and the second distribution means that performs an irregular operation are linked. This makes it possible to associate a plurality of distribution means that change the flow direction of the game ball, that is, the first distribution means and the second distribution means, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to make the flow mode of the game ball various, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the first sorting means is provided on the downstream side of the two sorting means in the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, by controlling the second distribution means, the first distribution means on the downstream side thereof is also controlled. Therefore, while simplifying the control configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow mode of the game ball using a plurality of distribution means.

Feature I3. A predetermined passing portion (V winning opening 182a) is provided on the downstream side of the first distribution means in the flow path of the game ball.
A privilege granting means (game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, open / close execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to the feature I2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, if the game ball passes through the predetermined passing portion through the distribution by each distribution means, the player can obtain the privilege. In this case, each distribution means arranged on the upstream side of the predetermined passing portion may be periodically operated on one side and irregularly operated on the other side, and the periodic operation is performed. While ensuring the fairness of the game by the distribution means side (first distribution means side), the privilege grant rate is given by the distribution means side (second distribution means side) where irregular movements are performed. It can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature I4. The first distribution means and the second distribution means so that the route from the first distribution means is shorter than the route from the second distribution means as the flow path to the predetermined passing portion. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the position with the means is set.

According to the above configuration, the distribution means on the side where the periodic operation is performed is arranged at a position closer to the predetermined passing portion. Therefore, it is difficult to give the player a feeling of unfairness.

Feature I5. The pachinko ball is characterized in that the flow path of the game ball is determined so that the pachinko ball can reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of whether the first distribution means distributes the pachinko ball in either the first direction or the second direction. The gaming machine according to the feature I3 or the feature I4.

According to the above configuration, even if periodical distribution is performed by the first distribution means, it is possible to reach a predetermined passing portion, so that the fairness of the game can be easily ensured.

In addition, in order to clarify the significance of distribution by the first distribution means,
As a configuration, "the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the rate is distributed in the first direction or the second direction". May be good.

Feature I6. The arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the vehicle is distributed in the first direction or the second direction.
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the setting means sets the second sorting means so that the first sorting means distributes the second sorting means toward the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is low. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that it can be performed.

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player is pleased if the distribution is made to the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is high. On the other hand, as described in the feature I5, since it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of the direction in which the distribution is made, whether or not the predetermined passing portion is reached when the distribution is made to the side with the higher arrival rate. The enjoyment of seeing the movement mode of the game ball may be reduced. Therefore, by setting the distribution by the second distribution means as described above, it is possible to fully enjoy the game of whether or not the privilege can be obtained depending on the operation mode of the game ball.

Feature I7. The feature is that the side having a low arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side having a high reaching rate to the predetermined passing portion. Features The gaming machine according to I6.

According to the above configuration, the enjoyment of seeing the operation mode of the game ball can be more effectively exhibited.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball is less likely to be received than the first state. Accessory device 150) and
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means, and
The first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and the second passage portion (removal passage 191b) through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion.
The first aspect (position where the rotating body 201 makes it easier to lead to the V winning side) and the first aspect than the first aspect, in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side. The second aspect (position that can be easily led out to the out side by the rotating body 201) that is difficult to distribute to the passing portion side, the distribution means (rotating body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing, and
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S2105 by the main control device 81) for grasping the switching status between the first aspect and the second aspect by grasping the sorting means, and
Based on the fact that the predetermined conditions are satisfied (the ball has entered the operating ports 38 and 39, the opening waiting time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.), the grasping result by the grasping means is added. Then, the gaming state transition means (mainly) capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means to a specific state (a state in which the processing under control is performed based on the normal opening result or the like) that can be executed a predetermined number of times. (Function to execute game control processing by the control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, state switching control is performed so that the variable receiving means can be received. Then, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the player is given a privilege. In this case, the grasping means grasps the state of the distribution member that determines whether or not to pass through the first passing portion, and the state switching control is performed in consideration of the grasping result of the grasping means. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it easy to pass through the first passing portion, or it is possible to make it difficult to pass through the first passing portion. Therefore, the ball is ejected as designed by the game machine designer, and the ball ejection rate can be preferably managed.

Feature J2. The game state transition means is
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the first timing (V distribution) in which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can easily reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect. A first state switching control mode (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is easy to be performed) and the first state switching control mode (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution can be easily performed) and the variable receiving means are set to the first state so as to include (timing that can be performed). ,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball accepted by the variable receiving means is difficult to reach the sorting means in the situation where the sorting means is the one aspect (V distribution is). A second state switching control mode (opening / closing control of the opening / closing accessory 168 so that the timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed) is set so that the variable receiving means is set to the first state so as to include (timing that is difficult to perform). ,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of shifting to the specific state including any of the above.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the game ball is distributed to the first passing portion side based on the grasping result by the grasping means is added to the period required for the game ball received by the variable receiving means to reach the sorting means. Will be done. By doing so, it is possible to make the ball as designed by the designer.

Feature J3. The grasping means grasps the position of the sorting means or the period from the previous switching timing (detection result by the rotation position detection sensor 196), and thereby switches between the first aspect and the second aspect. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or the feature J2, which is characterized by having a configuration capable of grasping.

According to the above configuration, the grasping means can exert the excellent effect of the above J1 with a simple configuration such as grasping the position of the sorting means or the period from the switching timing of the previous sorting means.

Features J4. The grasping means is the game ball when the variable receiving means receives the game ball into the variable receiving means during the period when the variable receiving means is in the first state based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that the mode of the distribution means can be grasped at the timing when the distribution means is reached.

According to the above configuration, regardless of when the game ball is received during the period when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the mode of the sorting means at the timing when the game ball reaches the sorting means is defined. Since it can be grasped, the distribution rate by the distribution means can be determined more accurately.

Feature J5. The sorting means has a rotating body that rotates at least in a predetermined cycle.
The grasping means has a detection sensor for detecting the position of the rotating body, and can grasp the position of the rotating body at least for the rotating body based on the detection result of the detection sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the above configuration, the conventional configuration can be suitably diverted to achieve the excellent effect described in J1.

Features J6. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300, 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means.
The first distribution means is arranged on the upstream side of the second distribution means.
The first passing portion and the second passing portion are arranged on the downstream side of the second sorting means.
The grasping means is configured to be able to grasp the position of either the first sorting means or the second sorting means or the period from the previous switching timing, while the first sorting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that the grasping result of the second sorting means is prioritized over the grasping result of.

According to the above configuration, by giving priority to the grasping result on the downstream side, it is possible to determine the distribution status at a position closer to the first passing portion or the second passing portion. As a result, it is possible to set the state switching control of the variable receiving means in which the grant rate of the privilege based on the passage to the first passing portion is more accurately taken into consideration.

Feature J7. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300, 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means.
The first distribution means is arranged on the upstream side of the second distribution means.
The first passing portion and the second passing portion are arranged on the downstream side of the second sorting means.
When the game ball is distributed by the first distribution means, the game ball can be derived to the first passing portion without passing through the second distribution means.
The grasping means has the first aspect and the second aspect of the second sorting means even when it is grasped that the grasping means can be distributed to the first passing portion side by the first sorting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that the switching situation is grasped.

According to the above configuration, even if the situation can be distributed to the first passing portion side by the first distribution means, if the status of the second distribution means is grasped, the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be performed. Regarding the setting, the status of the second distribution means can be reflected. By doing so, it becomes possible to set more various state switching controls.

Features J8. The distribution means has a first distribution means (distribution members 300, 310) and a second distribution means (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution means.
The second distribution means is arranged at a position where the visibility from the player is higher than that of the first distribution means.
When it is determined by the grasping means that the gaming state transition means can be distributed to the first passing portion side by either the first distribution means or the second distribution means, the second distribution means is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the state switching control can be set so that the pachinko and pachislot machines can be distributed to the first passing portion side by the dividing means.

According to the above configuration, the player can confirm that the distribution is performed by the distribution means (second distribution means) on the side with high visibility. Therefore, the feature J1 is wonderful, while taking into account the original enjoyment of the gaming machine, such as enjoying the movement of the gaming ball, rather than simply passing it through the first passage section (if the privilege is given). It becomes possible to play an effect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
Distribution means (opening / closing accessory 168) that can be switched between a first aspect of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area in a first direction and a second aspect of distributing a game ball flowing down in the game area in a second direction different from the first direction. When,
A predetermined passing portion (V winning opening 182a) provided on the downstream side of the distribution means in the flow path of the game ball, and
A privilege granting means (game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening / closing execution mode or round continuation) to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the predetermined passing portion. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The flow path of the game ball is determined so that the game ball can reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of whether the distribution means is distributed in either the first direction or the second direction.
The arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high or low depending on whether the vehicle is distributed in the first direction or the second direction.
When the distribution means distributes to the side having a high arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion, the means for changing the distribution so that the distribution means to the side having a low reaching rate to the predetermined passing portion (the first by the main control device 81). 2 A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing opening / closing timing change processing).

According to the above configuration, a privilege is given to the player when the game ball passes through the predetermined passing portion, and a distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined passing portion, depending on the distribution direction. The flow path is set so that the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is relatively high or low. In such a configuration, it is considered that the player wishes to be distributed to the side where the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is high. However, if it is possible to reach the predetermined passing portion regardless of which one is distributed, it is determined whether or not the distribution to the side having the lower arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion will reach the predetermined passing portion. It is possible to enjoy a feeling of excitement. In that respect, if a means for changing the distribution to the side with the higher arrival rate and the distribution to the side with the lower arrival rate is provided as in the above configuration, the flow of such a game ball can be fully enjoyed. It becomes possible and can be used to improve the interest.

Feature K2. The feature is that the side having a low arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to have higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side having a high reaching rate to the predetermined passing portion. Features The gaming machine described in K1.

According to the above configuration, the enjoyment of seeing the operation mode of the game ball can be more effectively exhibited.

In addition to the above background problems, the following feature groups are generally equipped with a variable ball entry device provided in a game area where a game ball flows down or rolls, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine. Further, regarding the background technique that the game ball flows down or rolls even in the variable ball entry device (see, for example, Patent Document 1), the configuration for specifying the behavior of the game ball here. However, there is still room for improvement. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on the player's launch operation,
A distribution means (first) that distributes a game ball from a predetermined location (ball distribution unit 185) on which the game ball launched by the launching means flows down to a plurality of paths (left passage area 412, right passage area 413, back passage area 414). 1 distribution member 300, 2nd distribution member 310),
A grasping means for grasping the ball passage of each of the above routes (a function of executing the passage region processing by the main control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a gauge configuration in which a game ball launched by a launching means is distributed from a predetermined location to a plurality of routes, it is possible to grasp which route the grasping means has passed. Here, in a general gaming machine, the entry of a gaming ball into a predetermined entry portion is detected, and processing such as fraud detection based on such entry detection information is performed. For example, the ball entry detection information based on the actual ball entry is performed for the act of detecting the ball as if it had entered the ball even though the ball has not actually entered the predetermined ball entry section. Countermeasures against fraud have been taken by focusing on the difference between the information and the ball entry detection information due to fraudulent activity. However, for example, in the act of intentionally guiding the game ball so that the ball is likely to enter the predetermined ball entry portion, the game ball is actually entering the ball. It is not possible to deal with it with conventional fraud countermeasures such as. Therefore, if this grasping result is used as a configuration for grasping which route has been passed as in the above configuration, it can greatly contribute to fraud detection and the like.

Feature L2. It is provided with a calculation means (a function of executing calculation processing by the main control device 81) capable of calculating and processing the ball passing status (passing rate) for each route based on the results of passing a plurality of balls grasped by the grasping means. The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp not only the ball passing result such as which route has passed, but also information such as which route is actually easier to pass if the ball passing status for each route can be known. can. By doing so, for example, in a gauge configuration designed so that the ease of passage differs for each route, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity based on the difference from the design.

Feature L3. It is provided with a number measuring means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2608 by the main control device 81) for measuring the number of game balls fired by the launching means.
The calculation means is characterized in that, as the ball passing situation, the passing rate of each path with respect to the number of shots measured by the number measuring means can be calculated based on the ball passing result. Feature The gaming machine described in L2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the passing rate of each route with respect to the number of shots actually fired. As the passing rate of each route, for example, the passing rate per unit time can be considered, but if the passing rate per unit time is simply calculated, the period during which the game ball is not actually launched is also taken into consideration. There is a concern that the arithmetic processing will be complicated, such as excluding cases where the player is replaced or stopped. On the other hand, if it is per number of shots, it is preferable because it does not complicate such arithmetic processing.

Further, according to the above configuration, it is possible to easily detect a fraudulent act that induces a false detection as if the game ball passed through each path without being launched. This is because if such fraudulent activity is performed, the game ball has not been fired, and the passing rate is considered to be abnormally high.

Feature L4. A predetermined ball entry portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39, V winning port 182a) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter.
A detection sensor (first operation sensor 38a, second operation sensor 39c, V winning sensor 192) that detects that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and
Equipped with
As the ball passing situation, the calculation means can calculate the passing rate of each path with respect to the number of balls entering the ball entering portion using the detection result of the detection sensor, based on the ball passing result. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the passing rate of each route for entering the ball into the ball entry portion. For example, the number of balls entering the ball entry section and the number of balls entering each path, such as a configuration in which passage of each route is permitted based on entry into the ball entry section, or a case where the entry section exists on the downstream side of each path. When it is closely related to the passing situation, it is highly meaningful to grasp the passing rate of each route with respect to the number of balls entering the ball entry section.

Feature L5. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the predetermined location is arranged at a position where the gaming ball can be reached based on the occurrence of the entry into the predetermined entry portion.

According to the above configuration, when a ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion, the game ball can reach a predetermined location, and the game ball is distributed to any of the routes from there. In this case, the ball has entered the predetermined entry portion as a stage before the passage of the ball is grasped by the grasping means, and the ball does not enter the predetermined entry portion. If the passage is grasped, or if the number of passages of each route is larger than the number of balls entering a predetermined entry portion, there is a possibility that some kind of inconvenience such as abnormality or fraud has occurred. Therefore, if the passing rate with respect to the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entry portion is grasped as in the feature L4, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be grasped on the gaming machine side.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion is arranged at a position where a gaming ball that has passed at least one of the said paths can be reached.

According to the above configuration, if the passing rate of each route is grasped, it becomes clear at a glance which route is followed to reach the predetermined ball entry portion. For example, in a gauge configuration in which the arrival rate to a predetermined ball entry portion differs depending on the route, the arrival rate may be low in the result of actual arithmetic processing even though the route has a high arrival rate by design, or conversely, the arrival rate. If the route is low but the arrival rate is high as a result of arithmetic processing, there is a possibility that some kind of inconvenience such as abnormality or fraud has occurred. Therefore, if the passing rate with respect to the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entry portion is grasped as in the feature L4, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be grasped on the gaming machine side.

Feature L7. Features L1 to L6 characterized by having an output means (a function of executing output processing by the main control device 81) to output information corresponding to the ball passing result grasped by the grasping means to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the information corresponding to the ball passing result can be grasped as the outside of the gaming machine, for example, by the management computer of the gaming hall or the like. By doing so, the manager of the gaming hall or the like can confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine or whether or not any fraudulent activity has been performed based on the information corresponding to the ball passing result. Is possible. In particular, since the information grasped by the grasping means is the information that the game ball originally passed through the route for the game ball to pass, it is often difficult to identify the occurrence of an abnormality or fraudulent activity only from this information. .. Even if the possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent activity is reported as an error notification, the uncertainty may hinder the smooth progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently identify the occurrence of an abnormality or fraudulent activity by entrusting the final confirmation to an external device, a game hall manager, or the like, rather than simply performing an error notification.

Feature L8. The grasping means is a stop grasping means capable of grasping that the game ball stays in the path for a predetermined period or longer (a process for storing a corresponding ball jam flag in the detection process of each passing area by the main control device 81). Equipped with
The feature L1 is provided with a first notification means (a function of executing error processing based on a ball jam state by the staging control device 82) that executes the first notification based on the grasping result by the stop grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of L7.

According to the above configuration, when ball clogging occurs in the route to be grasped by the grasping means, the first notification is performed. Here, the ball jam of the game ball may occur at the ball entry portion where the game ball enters, or may occur at a location different from the ball entry portion. If the ball is clogged at the ball entry portion, the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entry portion, and the player may suffer a disadvantage. In addition, as a place different from the ball entry part, even if a ball jam occurs in the passage path to the ball entry part, the game ball cannot pass from the place to the ball entry part, which is also a disadvantage for the player. Can lead to. In these cases, in the conventional gaming machine provided with the detection sensor in the ball entry section, the ball jam in the ball entry section can be grasped, but the ball jam that occurs in a place different from the ball entry section can be grasped. I can't. Further, for example, when a ball jam occurs in one of a plurality of routes, the game ball is easily distributed to a route different from the one route in which the ball jam occurs, and as a result, the game ball is easily distributed. Not only the player but also the game hall can suffer disadvantages. Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a grasping means capable of grasping the passage of the game ball in each route as described in the feature L1, the ball clogging that occurs at a place (each route) different from the ball entry portion can also be grasped. If the configuration is such that the notification is made as the first notification, the manager of the game hall or the like can quickly perform the work of clearing the ball clogging, and the player and the game hall suffer from the inconvenience. Profit can be reduced.

In particular, if this configuration is applied to the feature L7, the grasping result of the grasping means may be output to the outside of the gaming machine by the output means, or may be notified as the first notification. In this case, the ball jam is an obvious abnormality (error), and the event is also a phenomenon that can be visibly grasped by the player. Then, if the occurrence of this ball jam causes a disadvantage for the player, the player himself will call the manager of the game hall, etc., but the disadvantage does not occur (advantageous) for the player. If so, some players may not call the administrator or the like. That is, if the gaming machine (or the gaming hall) does not specify this state, it is considered that the act of trying to continue the gaming as it is is also performed. However, since this ball jam is not necessarily caused by an illegal act, it is considered excessive to regard the act of continuing the game as it is as an illegal act. Therefore, if the output means outputs information corresponding to the grasping result of the grasping means, but the gaming machine itself can notify the ball jam, the manager of the gaming hall can quickly respond. It is possible to inform the player that the gaming machine is aware of the occurrence of this ball jam, and it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned actions.

Feature L9. A passing portion (V winning opening 182a) arranged downstream of at least one of the above-mentioned routes and through which a game ball can pass, and
A detection means (V winning sensor 192) capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the passing portion, and
A second notification is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection means, even though the passage of the ball is not grasped by the grasping means for any of the routes. Notification means (a function to execute processing corresponding to the V error state by the main control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8.

According to the above configuration, the second notification is performed when the vehicle passes through the passage portion arranged downstream of each route without passing through each route. For example, in a configuration in which there is no route to the passing portion other than each route, the event in which the passage of the passing portion is detected is an obvious abnormality. Therefore, when such an event occurs, the second notification is performed, so that the game hall manager, etc. is notified as compared with the case where the game hall manager, etc. is notified via the external output. It is possible to take prompt action by. Therefore, it is possible to use the grasping result of the grasping means to make a different coping method for each event and to respond appropriately to each event.

Feature L10. A passage portion (V winning opening 182a) capable of giving a privilege to the player based on the passage of the game ball is arranged downstream of at least one of the above-mentioned routes. The gaming machine according to any one of L1 to L9.

According to the above configuration, it becomes clear from the grasping result of the grasping means which route is followed to reach the passing portion where the privilege can be given. Here, from the viewpoint of discovering fraudulent acts aimed at illegally obtaining benefits, it can be said that the common sense of technology is that the passage portion that directly triggers the benefits can be checked. However, the fraudulent act is not always performed on the passing part, and it may not be clear whether or not the fraudulent act is performed only by checking the passing part as in the conventional case. In particular, in a gaming machine in which the flow route of a game ball to a passing portion is various and the interest of the game is improved, the various flow routes are taken in the opposite direction and the passing portion is followed by an abnormal route. It is also conceivable that an act that intentionally increases the passing rate to the passing part, such as passing through the passage, is performed. Therefore, as described in the above feature L1, if it is possible to grasp the passage of each route, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the fraud check.

Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L10, characterized in that a detecting means (V winning sensor 192) capable of detecting that a gaming ball has passed through the passing portion is provided.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the grasping means in the feature L1 and the detection means provided in the conventional privilege-grantable passing portion becomes clearer.

In addition to the detection means that can detect the passage of the game ball, the detection means can detect the clogging of the ball in the passing portion, the radio wave applied to the passing portion, and the passing portion. It may be something that can detect the applied magnetism, etc., and these may be collectively expressed as a detection means that can detect a predetermined event.

Feature L12. A bonus device (feature device 150) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means is provided.
The predetermined location is arranged at a position where the game ball that has entered the accessory device can reach.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L11, wherein the distribution means distributes a gaming ball that has entered the bonus device to a plurality of paths in the bonus device.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball that has entered the accessory device is distributed to each route by the distribution means, the passage of each route is grasped by the grasping means. That is, the content grasped by the grasping means is the content relating to the distribution destination of the game ball that has entered the accessory device. In particular, with respect to the accessory device having the distribution means, the privilege given to the player often differs greatly depending on the distribution destination, and if the grasping means of the feature L1 is applied to such a configuration, which distribution destination is used. It is possible to accurately grasp information such as whether or not the privilege was granted by being distributed to. In such an accessory device, for example, there is a device having a passing portion called a V winning opening (V zone), and there is a device provided with a plurality of routes as a route to the V winning opening. Further, in general, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, according to the configuration of the feature L1, the route leading to the V winning opening is grasped, and it is possible to grasp the information on which route is followed to reach the V winning opening. By doing so, it is possible to perform processing based on the route to the V winning opening in the accessory device. The processing based on the route to the V winning opening is, for example, when the route is rarely passed but frequently passes, or when the route with a high arrival rate to the V winning opening is passed at an abnormal rate. Is a process for determining an abnormality, a process for determining an abnormality and performing a notification, and the like. As described above, it is possible to suitably grasp and manage the information of the passing route after entering the accessory device.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
Passing portions (left passing area 412, right passing area 413, back passing area 414, V winning opening 182a, etc.) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can pass.
Passage detection means (left pass detection sensor 402, right pass detection sensor 403, back pass detection sensor 404, V winning sensor 192, etc.) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passing portion.
An arithmetic means (a function of executing arithmetic processing by the main control device 81) that executes a predetermined arithmetic processing by using the detection result based on the passage detection means, and
An output means (a function of executing output processing by the main control device 81) for outputting the calculation result of the calculation means to another device, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game ball is launched toward the game area based on the launch operation by the player, and when the game ball passes through the passing portion, it is detected by the passage detecting means. Then, using the detection result, a predetermined calculation process is performed, and then the calculation result is output to another device. The other device refers to, for example, a data display device provided in the game hall, a hall computer in the game hall, and a control device on the sub side for displaying the display of the game machine. If the above calculation results can be grasped by these other devices, for example, the passing rate per unit time may be significantly different from the design of the gaming machine, or the passing rate of other ball-entry parts or passing parts may be different. / It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to easily grasp that the relationship with the passing rate is different from the design. If an event different from the above design occurs, for example, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed or a failure on the gaming machine side (ball jam, etc.) has occurred, as described above. If the manager of the game hall can grasp it, it will be possible to quickly resolve these events.

In addition, in the above-mentioned feature M1, separately from the above-mentioned "output means", "the output means (main control device 81) which outputs the detection result based on the said passage detection means to another apparatus without executing the said predetermined arithmetic processing. The above-mentioned "other device" is configured without performing the information output after the predetermined arithmetic processing is performed and the predetermined arithmetic processing without performing the predetermined arithmetic processing. It is possible to grasp the output information and. In this case, the "output means for outputting the calculation result to another device" is the "first output means", and the "output means for outputting the calculation result to the other device without executing the predetermined calculation process" is the "second output means". When expressed as "output means", each output means is more clearly distinguished. Here, a conventional gaming machine is generally provided with an output means (second output means) that outputs without performing a predetermined calculation process, but a predetermined calculation is performed in addition to the second output means. If the configuration has a first output means for outputting the operation result of the process, the effect of the first output means can be obtained without significantly changing the existing configuration. Further, in other devices, it is sufficient to select whether to use the conventional information from the first output means or the information from the second output means, so that the other device also has a configuration. Does not require major changes. Not only that, in the first output means, the arithmetic processing is performed on the gaming machine side and the result is output, for example, when an error occurs in the arithmetic processing (a bug in the arithmetic program, etc.). If the raw data (information from the second output means) is grasped by another device, it is possible for the other device to grasp the occurrence of the error, and the accuracy of data management should be improved. Is possible.

Further, the feature M1 can be expressed as follows.
"A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
Passing portions (left passing area 412, right passing area 413, back passing area 414) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can pass.
Passage detection means (left passage detection sensor 402, right passage detection sensor 403, back passage detection sensor 404) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the passage portion, and
An output means (a function of executing output processing by the main control device 81) that outputs a calculation result using the detection result based on the passage detection means to another device, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. "

Features M2. Comparison means for comparing the calculation result of the calculation means with a predetermined set value (design value) (a function of executing a comparison process by the main control device 81, a function of executing a collation process of raw data by the staging control device 82). ) Is provided, the gaming machine according to the feature M1.

According to the above configuration, the calculation result can be compared with the set value. The set value may be, for example, a passing rate in the design of a gaming machine, an upper limit value / a lower limit value of the fluctuation width of the passing rate, etc., and is a calculation target by a calculation means (per unit time to a predetermined passing portion). It depends on whether the passing rate is calculated or the relationship with the passing rate / entry rate to another passing section / entry section is calculated). By comparing such a value with the calculation result of the calculation means, it is possible to clearly determine whether or not the event actually occurring in the gaming machine is as designed.

Features M3. The game according to feature M2, wherein the output means has a configuration capable of outputting a comparison result by the comparison means.

According to the above configuration, since the comparison result is output, it is sufficient for other devices to use the received contents as they are and determine whether or not the set values are met. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load as another device. Even in this case, if the configuration has a second output means for outputting raw data in addition to the above output means (first output means), the comparison result can also be compared with the raw data. It is possible to manage data with higher accuracy.

Features M4. A first control device (main control device 81) having at least the calculation means and the output means, and
A second control device (effect control device 82) capable of receiving information output from the output means, and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the comparison means is possessed by the second control device.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to disperse the processing load by performing the processing by the staging means and the output means and the processing by the comparison means by separate control devices.

Feature M5. An entry portion (V winning opening 182a) into which a game ball that has passed through the predetermined passage portion can enter, and a ball entry portion (V winning opening 182a).
A ball entry detection means (V winning sensor 192) for detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to a player based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a privilege is given when a game ball enters a ball entry section after passing through a predetermined passing section, the calculation target (data) of the calculation means has passed through the predetermined passing section. It is data and is different from the ball entry data to the ball entry section. The passing data of the passing portion is the data before entering the ball, and is the information of passing through the passing portion that passes before actually entering the ball. The ball entry data may include those that entered the ball without passing through the passing portion. Then, by performing the calculation using the passage data of the passing portion provided as the route to the entry portion, it is possible to obtain information such as what kind of route is followed to reach the entry portion. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of data management.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "privilege granting means" is based on "the privilege is given to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the ball entry detection means, while the game ball is detected by the passage detection means". If it is clarified that the privilege is not given based on passing through the "passing part" by expressing it as "a privilege granting means that does not give the privilege to the player", it is meaningful to use the ball entry data and the passing data properly. Can be made clearer.

In addition, the "privilege" given by the "privilege granting means" includes, for example, a predetermined number of prize balls, a special state advantageous to the player, and whether or not a special state is generated. It shall also include the lottery.

Features M6. It is equipped with a means for executing a game progress process (a function of executing a normal process by the main control device 81) for the progress of the game.
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, wherein the detection result by the passage detecting means is used for the predetermined arithmetic processing without being used for the gaming progress processing.

According to the above configuration, since the detection result by the passage detecting means is not used for the game progress processing, the progress of the game is not affected even if the passage is passed through a predetermined passing portion. For example, in the case of data for the ball entry portion used in the game progress process, it is sufficient to grasp the occurrence of an error in the game progress process, but for the data not used in the game progress process. , It is necessary to grasp the occurrence of the error in the game progress process, or to grasp the occurrence of the error separately. However, the data that is not used in the game progress processing is considered to be data that has nothing to do with or has little relation to the game progress in the first place. Attempting to grasp it may lead to an enormous amount of game progress processing. In particular, for data that is not directly related to the progress of the game, it is often not possible to grasp the occurrence of an error as it is, and for example, it may be possible to grasp the occurrence of an error by performing arithmetic processing or the like. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the occurrence of an error is grasped by separately performing arithmetic processing on such data, it is possible to manage the passing data of the passing portion within a range that does not adversely affect the game progress processing.

Feature M7. An entry portion (V winning opening 182a) into which a game ball that has passed through the predetermined passage portion can enter, and a ball entry portion (V winning opening 182a).
A ball entry detection means (V winning sensor 192) for detecting that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege to a player based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detecting means,
Equipped with
As the predetermined passing portion, it has a first passing portion (back passage region 414) and a second passing portion (left passing region 412).
As the passage detecting means, the first passing portion is provided with a first passing detecting means, and the second passing portion is provided with a second passing detecting means.
The calculation means can execute the predetermined calculation process by using the detection results of the first passage detection means and the second passage detection means.
In the flow path from the first passing portion and the second passing portion to the entering portion, the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion has the entry ball more than the gaming ball that has passed through the second passing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, characterized in that it is formed so as to easily reach the portion.

According to the above configuration, a first passing portion and a second passing portion are provided as predetermined passing portions, and passing through the first passing portion leads to the ball entry portion after passing through the second passing portion. In a configuration that is easy to reach, a predetermined arithmetic process is performed using the detection result that has passed through the first passing portion and the detection result that has passed through the second passing portion. As described above, in the configuration in which the arrival rate to the ball entry portion in each passing portion is different, it is considered that the passing rate of each passing portion is designed according to the level of the arrival rate. For example, the passing rate on the side with a low arrival rate to the ball entry portion (second passing portion) is increased, and the passing rate on the side with a high reaching rate (first passing portion) is decreased. In this case, as the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, for example, when the actual passing rate of the first passing portion is abnormally higher than that designed, the privilege based on the entry into the entry portion is intentionally given. There is a possibility that the fraudulent activity that you are trying to obtain is being carried out. Further, as the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, for example, when the passing rate of the second passing portion is abnormally lower than that of the design, there is some inconvenience (ball clogging, etc.) that the data cannot pass through the second passing portion. It may have occurred. Therefore, in relation to these arrival rates, if the passage rate of each passing portion is calculated by arithmetic processing, it is possible to detect the occurrence of fraudulent acts and inconveniences more quickly, and improve the accuracy of data management. It will be possible.

Features M8. One of a first derivation mode that is provided on the upstream side of the first passing portion and the second passing portion and leads to the first passing portion, and a second derivation mode that leads to the second passing portion. The feature is characterized in that the distribution means (second distribution member 310) for distributing the reached game ball to either the first passage portion or the second passage portion is provided by switching to the aspect of. The gaming machine described in M7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the distribution rate to which the passing portion the sorting means distributes by referring to the passing rate of each passing portion. The distribution means is configured to be switchable between the first derivation mode and the second derivation mode, but if a malfunction occurs in which the mode of the distribution means is not switched properly, the distribution rate as designed. It can be a different distribution rate than. In this case, the arrival rate to the ball entry portion will be different from the designed one. Therefore, for example, if the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is data that can determine whether or not the passing rate of each passing portion is as designed, it is indirectly determined whether or not the sorting means is operating normally. It is possible to grasp by the passing rate. Therefore, for example, in order to determine whether or not the mode of the sorting means has been switched normally, it is not necessary to grasp the position of the sorting means in detail, and the detection sensor can be simplified / omitted. Can be done.

Features M9. Special notification execution means (a function of executing error processing by the effect control device 82) capable of receiving the calculation result of the calculation means and executing the special notification corresponding to the received calculation result by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the manager or the like of the game hall can grasp the calculation result of the predetermined calculation process by the special notification performed by the notification means possessed by the game machine. As a result, the content of the special notification can be grasped in comparison with the content and situation of the game, and the convenience of the data can be improved.

Features M10. Time management means for managing time (RTC counter of RAM 144) and
A predetermined effect executing means (a function of executing RTC effect processing by the effect control device 82) for executing a predetermined effect based on the predetermined time set by the time management means.
Equipped with
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification by not executing the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means or by performing a restriction process (error notification process) in which the execution timing of the predetermined effect is different. The gaming machine according to the feature M9, which is characterized by having such a configuration.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is an effect to be executed when a predetermined time is reached. For example, assuming that a plurality of gaming machines of the same type are installed side by side in the game hall, the predetermined time is set. When it becomes possible, all of the same type of gaming machines will be given a predetermined effect, and it is possible to make a flashy production as if the production is being performed all at once while linking with other gaming machines. On the premise that such a predetermined effect is set, as a special notification, if the restriction process is performed so that the predetermined effect is not executed or the execution timing is different, the restriction process is performed. Can be clearly understood in relation to other gaming machines.

Here, if there is a high possibility that a failure or error (ball jam, etc.) has occurred on the gaming machine side or an event in which fraudulent activity has been performed has occurred, the occurrence of that event is reported by the manager of the gaming hall, etc. It is thought that flashy notifications should be made by sound or light so that the pachinko machine can be grasped quickly. However, in a gaming machine in which a wide variety of effects are set, it may be difficult to distinguish it from other effects, no matter how flashy the notification is given. It is also considered that even if it is possible to grasp the flashy notification by looking at the flashy notification near the gaming machine, it is difficult to grasp it even if the flashy notification of the gaming machine is seen from the end of the island equipment in the hall. Be done. In other words, no matter how flashy the notification is, many other productions are also flashy these days, and there is a possibility that the game hall will be buried in the production of other gaming machines and overlooked. However, there is a limit to making the notification from the gaming machine more flashy. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if the restriction processing of the predetermined effect performed at the unified timing in the gaming machine of the same type is performed, the gaming machine stands out in relation to other gaming machines of the same type, and the restriction processing is performed. You can clearly grasp what was done.

In particular, compared to the case where a ball is actually clogged or a fraudulent act is performed by a magnet or vibration, this configuration has a certain degree of possibility that these events have occurred, so it is quick to notify. It is considered that sex is not so required. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem even if the configuration is such that the execution of the special notification is waited until the predetermined time is reached as described above.

Features M11. It is provided with a number measuring means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2608 by the main control device 81) for measuring the number of game balls fired by the launching means.
The calculation means has a configuration capable of calculating the passage rate of the passing portion, which is the number detected by the passage detection means with respect to the number of shots measured by the number measuring means, as the predetermined calculation process. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of M1 to M10.

According to the above configuration, as a result of calculation by the calculation means, it is possible to grasp the passing rate of the passing portion with respect to the number of shots actually fired. As the passing rate of the passing part, for example, the passing rate per unit time can be considered, but in the passing rate per unit time, if the passing rate per unit time is simply calculated, the game ball is actually launched. There is a possibility that the period that has not been done is also taken into consideration, and there is a concern that the arithmetic processing will be complicated, such as excluding cases where the player is replaced or stopped. On the other hand, if it is per number of shots, it is preferable because it does not complicate such arithmetic processing.

Further, according to the above configuration, it is possible to easily detect a fraudulent act that induces a false detection as if the game ball passed through the passing portion without being fired. This is because if such fraudulent activity is performed, the game ball has not been fired, and the passing rate is considered to be abnormally high.

Features M12. A starting ball entry portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball is provided.
The passing portion has a configuration in which the game ball is allowed to pass based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting ball entering portion.
One of the features M1 to M11, wherein the calculation means has a configuration capable of calculating a pass rate, which is the number of balls detected by the pass detection means with respect to the number of balls entering the starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, as a result of calculation by the calculation means, it is possible to grasp the passing rate of the passing portion with respect to the entry into the starting ball entry portion. Since the passing portion is configured to allow the passage of the ball based on the entry into the starting entry portion, if the above is performed, the passing portion is passed without the entry into the starting entry portion. Such fraudulent activity can be easily detected. This is because if such a fraudulent act is performed, the ball has not entered the starting ball entry portion, and therefore the passing rate is considered to be abnormally high.

Feature M13. A special state (opening / closing execution mode) is set in which the passing rate to the passing portion is improved compared to the normal gaming state.
The game according to any one of features M1 to M12, wherein the calculation means has a configuration capable of performing the calculation processing without using the detection result of the passage detection means in the special state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the passing information in the special state in which the passing rate of the passing portion is improved can be calculated and output only in the passing information in the normal gaming state without using the data for the calculation processing. By doing so, the passing rate (processing result of arithmetic processing) can be suitably grasped.

If the above configuration is as follows, it is possible to separately grasp the data in the special state and the data in the normal gaming state.

"A special state (opening / closing execution mode) is set in which the passing rate to the passing portion is improved compared to the normal gaming state.
The calculation means is the calculation process based on the detection result of the first calculation means that performs the calculation process based on the detection result of the passage detection means in the special state and the passage detection means in the normal gaming state. It is equipped with a second calculation means for performing the above. "

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area based on the player's launch operation, and
The first passing portion (V winning opening 182a) and the second passing portion (left passing area 412) through which the game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
The first passage detecting means (a function of executing the winning process by the main control device 81) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, and
The second passage detecting means (a function of executing the detection process of the left passing region by the main control device 81) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passing portion, and
A function of executing an effect processing by a first notification execution means (effect control device 82) for executing a first notification (notification for a big hit) by a predetermined notification means using the detection result by the first passage detection means. )When,
A second notification (error notification) is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means by using the detection result by the first passage detection means and the detection result by the second passage detection means. Notification execution means (function to execute error notification processing by the effect control device 82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a game ball is launched toward a game area, a first pass portion and a second pass portion are provided in the game area, and when only the first pass portion is passed, the game area is provided. The first notification is performed, and when the first passing portion and the second passing portion are passed, the second notification is performed. As a result, in addition to the game of simply aiming at the first passing portion and the second passing portion, the first passing portion is passed and then the second passing portion is passed, or the second passing portion is passed and then the first passing. It will be possible to play games such as passing through the club, and the games will be diversified.

Also, for example, if you pass through one passing part and then pass through the other passing part, different benefits will be given. In the case of a configuration in which another process is performed, the player can easily grasp that the other process has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by performing notifications according to various games.

Feature N2. A privilege granting means (payout control device 97) for granting a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition is provided.
The passing of the game ball through the first passing portion is included in the granting condition, while the passing of the gaming ball through the second passing portion is not included in the granting condition. The gaming machine according to the feature N1.

According to the above configuration, since passing through the first passing portion is included in the granting condition, it is considered that the player should be notified by itself to notify the player that the privilege is granted. On the other hand, since passing through the second passage part is not included in the grant condition, it is rather annoying for the player to know the notification that does not lead to the privilege grant even if the notification is made by itself. There is a possibility of letting it go. Therefore, it is considered that the player is likely to be interested in the information that the player has passed through the second passing portion, as in the feature N1, if the information that has passed through the first passing portion is notified together with the information that has passed through the first passing portion that leads to the granting of benefits. .. Therefore, the degree of attention to each notification can be suitably increased.

Feature N3. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2, wherein the second passing section is provided as one of the routes leading to the first passing section on the upstream side of the first passing section.

According to the above configuration, the second passing portion is one of the routes leading to the first passing portion, and it can be said that the game ball can pass through even if a normal firing operation is performed. In other words, it can be said that the second passage portion is different from the area through which the second passage portion is passed for an unusual fraudulent purpose. If it is an area that is passed for an illegal purpose, it is considered that if it is detected that the area has passed through the second passing section, it should be promptly notified without waiting for the passing of the first passing section. On the other hand, since the above configuration is not a region to be passed for such an illegal purpose, it is meaningful to wait for the passage of the first passing portion and notify the notification as in the feature M1.

Feature N4. An accessory provided in the game area and having a variable ball entry means (opening / closing accessory 168) that can be displaced into an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state. Equipped with means (accessory device 150),
The accessory means is provided with a plurality of passing areas through which the entered game ball passes.
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the first passing portion and the second passing portion are formed in the passing region.

According to the above configuration, the passing information between the first passing portion and the second passing portion of the passing region in the accessory means can be notified by the first notification and the second notification. That is, if the game ball that has entered the accessory means passes through the first passing portion without passing through the second passing portion, the first notification is performed, and the game ball passes through the second passing portion and passes through the first passage. After passing through the section, the second notification is performed. In this way, by notifying the route through which the game ball in the accessory means has passed by each notification, for example, the content such as which route is likely to reach the first passage portion and which route reaches the first passage portion. It is possible to let the player, the manager of the game hall, etc. understand the contents such as whether it is difficult. As a player, it is possible to advance the game in an advantageous manner by using the information on the ease of reaching, and if the route that is easy to reach or the route that is difficult to reach the first passage is far from the design of the gaming machine, it is illegal. It is also possible to judge that there is a high possibility that the act is being performed, and the management of the game hall manager and the like can be facilitated.

Feature N5. Based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion by the first passing detecting means, the transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state to a special state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to feature N4, which comprises a function of executing a gaming state transition process by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature N4 can be associated with the transition of the special state. That is, according to the first notification, it is possible to notify that the transition to the special state has occurred without passing through the second passage portion, and according to the second notification, the transition to the special state has passed through the second passage portion. Can be informed. Therefore, the player can grasp the route that easily shifts to the special state, and the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp if the transition route of the special state is far from the design value.

Feature N6. The special state is set so that the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state.
A limiting means (a function of executing a pass area process by the main control device 81 in the thirteenth embodiment) capable of limiting the execution of the second notification by the second notification executing means in the special state. The gaming machine according to feature N5, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, since the variable ball entry means is opened in the special state, it becomes easy to enter the accessory means. Therefore, as compared with before the transition to the special state, the possibility of passing through the second passing portion is higher, and the frequency of the second notification may be higher. Here, the second notification is for notifying the information of the route leading to the first passing portion, as described in the feature N4, and such a second notification is frequently performed during the special state. There is a possibility that the player cannot enjoy the special condition. Therefore, if the second notification is restricted during the special state, the special state can be fully enjoyed.

Feature N7. The second notification executing means detects that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion a plurality of times by the first passing detecting means, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the first passing. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, characterized in that the second notification is executed by using the detection result of the detection means and the detection result of the second passage detection means.

According to the above configuration, the second notification is performed not by triggering once of passing through the first passing portion, but by triggering that it has occurred a plurality of times (or that a period in which it can occur a plurality of times has elapsed). By doing so, it is possible not only to reduce the frequency of the second notification, but also to notify the passing rate of the first passing portion and the second passing portion. Therefore, as compared with the single notification, the information of the route reaching the first passage portion can be notified as more accurate.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. It is a gaming machine installed in the island equipment of the gaming hall where multiple machines of the same model can be installed.
A time management means (RTC counter of RAM 144) that manages the passage of time,
Based on the time managed by the time management means, the predetermined effect executing means (RTC effect by the effect control device 82) for executing the predetermined effect by the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 51). Function to execute processing) and
Predetermined event grasping means (function for executing error processing by the staging control device 82) for grasping the occurrence of a predetermined event, and
Equipped with
When the occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped by the predetermined event grasping means, the limiting means (effect) capable of preventing the predetermined effect from being executed by the predetermined effect executing means or limiting the execution timing of the predetermined effect to be different. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing error notification processing by the control device 82).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event depending on whether or not a predetermined effect is executed or a deviation in the execution timing occurs based on the predetermined time. In recent years, the production of gaming machines has become more diversified and sophisticated. For example, even if an attempt is made to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event by a notification means possessed by the gaming machine, the production of another gaming machine or other of the gaming machine is performed. There is a risk that the manager of the game hall will not notice the notification because it is buried in the production. Therefore, if the same model is installed and the effect of the same model is used and the effect is not performed or the execution timing of the effect is different, the manager of the game hall can be used. Etc. can be easily grasped. Therefore, it is possible to notify a predetermined event with a simple configuration.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined time is set so that the predetermined effect is periodically executed.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be grasped by the limitation of the predetermined effect performed periodically. The predetermined time that is executed periodically is, for example, every hour, every 30 minutes, or a cycle that can occur multiple times during the business hours of the game hall (for example, 14 hours). It is preferable to set so as to be.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2, wherein the predetermined event grasping means has a configuration capable of grasping the occurrence of the predetermined event at a timing before the predetermined time.

Feature O4. Equipped with a specific event grasping means (a function to execute fraud detection processing by the main control device 81) for grasping the occurrence of a specific event that cannot or is difficult to continue the game.
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific event grasping means, the special notification executing means (the special notification executing means) that executes the special notification by the predetermined notification means or another notification means (error display unit or speaker unit 64). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing fraudulent notification processing by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, when a specific event occurs in which the game cannot be continued or the game cannot be continued, the special notification is executed. On the other hand, when a predetermined event occurs, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted. In this way, by distinguishing between a specific event and a predetermined event and making separate notifications, notifications with different purposes such as urgent notifications (occurrence of specific events) and notifications that do not (occurrence of predetermined events) can be performed. It is possible to make a suitable notification mode according to each purpose.

In addition, for specific events where it is impossible to continue the game or it is difficult to continue the game, for example, when a fraudulent act such as magnetic detection or vibration detection is detected, or when a state where the game medium is clogged in the payout passage of the game medium is detected. , When it is detected that the power is cut off or the door of the gaming machine is opened.

Feature O5. The special notification executing means has a configuration capable of executing the special notification without waiting for the occurrence of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means when the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific event grasping means. The gaming machine according to the feature O4.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature O4 can be substantially exhibited.

Feature O6. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the limiting means allows time management by the time management means when the predetermined effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined effect is limited, the execution or the execution timing of the predetermined effect when the predetermined time is reached is merely limited, and the time managed by the time management means is not changed. Therefore, for example, when the predetermined event is resolved, it is possible to perform the predetermined effect as usual without limiting the predetermined event, and it is possible to prevent the execution opportunity of the predetermined effect from being unnecessarily reduced.

Feature O7. In the limiting means, even if the occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped by the predetermined event grasping means before the predetermined time, the occurrence of the predetermined event is caused by the predetermined event grasping means at the timing when the predetermined time is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, which is characterized in that the configuration does not limit the predetermined effect if it is not grasped.

According to the above configuration, even if a predetermined event occurs before the predetermined time, if the predetermined event is resolved at the predetermined time, the predetermined effect can be generated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the chance of executing the predetermined effect from being unnecessarily reduced.

Feature O8. Equipped with a privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the payout control device 97, the main control device 81, etc.) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined grant condition. ,
The predetermined event grasping means is characterized in that the occurrence of the predetermined event is grasped by using the information (detection result of each passage detection sensor 402 to 404) not included in the given condition. The gaming machine according to any one of O7.

According to the above configuration, it can be said that the predetermined event is grasped based on the specific information that is not related to the privilege grant. Then, even if a predetermined event occurs, it is considered that the influence on the privilege grant is small, and even if the predetermined event is not notified promptly, the disadvantage given to the player is small. Therefore, as a mode for notifying the occurrence of such a predetermined event, if the predetermined effect on the effect side is used, the notification can be balanced between the ease of management of the game hall and the disadvantage given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

When the present configuration is applied to the configuration of the feature O4, it is assumed that "the specific event grasping means grasps the occurrence of the specific event by using the information included in the grant condition". It becomes possible to clarify the difference between and a specific event.

In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each feature A to O group described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to O group to each other, and some or all of them may be combined to form each feature A to each feature A to O. It may be applied to each invention of group O. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to O.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... pachinko machine, 24 ... game board, 38 ... first operating port, 39 ... second operating port, 51 ... symbol display device, 60 ... launch handle, 81 ... main control device, 82 ... production control device, 150 ... role Object device, 168 ... Opening / closing accessory, 182a ... V winning opening, 182b ... Outlet opening, 192 ... V winning sensor, 193 ... Outing sensor, 300 ... First distribution member, 300a ... First distribution drive unit, 310 ... 2nd distribution member, 310a ... 2nd distribution drive unit, 402 ... left passage detection sensor, 403 ... right passage detection sensor, 404 ... back passage detection sensor, 412 ... left passage region, 413 ... right passage region, 414 … The back passage area.

Claims (1)

A launching means that launches a game ball based on the player's launch operation,
An entry means that allows a game ball launched by the launch means to enter, and a ball entry means.
When a game ball enters the ball entry means, a grant determination means capable of executing a grant determination to grant a privilege to the player, and a grant determination means.
When the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means, the effect execution means capable of executing the effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination by the predetermined effect means, and the effect execution means.
Distributing means for distributing the game balls launched by the launching means to a plurality of routes, and
A grasping means for grasping the ball passage of each of the above routes, and
A calculation means capable of calculating a predetermined ratio that can occur within the range of normal operation of the gaming machine by using a plurality of ball passing results grasped by the grasping means.
Equipped with
The calculation means can execute the calculation process so that the ball passing result in a specific state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is not included in the predetermined ratio.
At least the first control means including the grant determination means, the grasping means, and the calculation means, and
At least a second control means provided with the effect executing means, and
Have,
The first control means is provided separately from the second control means, and is characterized in that the first control means is provided with means capable of outputting the calculation result by the calculation means to the means provided so as not to be visually recognized by the player. A gaming machine.

Images